Digital PDFs

EK-SX300-IG-B01

December 1994

320 pages

Original

1.8MB

Document:	Sx300 Storage Array Installation Guide
Order Number:	EK-SX300-IG
Revision:	B01
Pages:	320
Original Filename:

OCR Text

Sx300 Storage Array
Installation Guide
Order Number: EK–SX300–IG. B01

This manual provides the steps to install Sx7x and RA9x storage enclosures
and magazine tape subsystems in the Sx300 storage array cabinet.

Digital Equipment Corporation
Maynard, Massachusetts

First Edition, December 1991
Second Edition, January 1994
Possession, use, or copying of the software described in this documentation is authorized only
pursuant to a valid written license from Digital, an authorized sublicensor, or the identified
licensor.
FCC NOTICE: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy. The
equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
Any changes or modifications made to this equipment may void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user,
at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
While Digital believes the information included in this publication is correct as of the date of
publication, it is subject to change without notice.
Digital Equipment Corporation makes no representations that the interconnection of its products
in the manner described in this document will not infringe existing or future patent rights, nor
do the descriptions contained in this document imply the granting of licenses to make, use, or
sell equipment or software in accordance with the description.
NOTE: APPLIES FOR INSTALATION IN GERMANY. Das in diesem Manual beschriebene
Geraet wurde von TUEV Produkt Service GmbH auf Sicherheit geprueft und traegt das GS
Zeichen. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Eingriffe in das Geraet, Rerparaturen oder der Einbau von
Erweiterungen nur von DIGITAL Personal oder von DIGITAL authorisiertem Personal erfolgen
darf, da sonst die GS Zulassung ungueltig wird. Die Zulassung wird auch ungueltig, wenn nicht
von DIGITAL qualifizierte Speichererweiterungen eingebaut werden.
Das Geraet muss so aufgestellt werden, dass die Steckdose frei zugaenglich ist. © Digital
Equipment Corporation, 1991, 1994.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
DEC, Digital, MSCP, Q-bus, RA, SA, SDI, TMSCP, VAX, VAX4000, VAX6000, VAXcluster, XMI,
and the DIGITAL logo are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.

This document was prepared using VAX DOCUMENT Version 2.1.

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 General Information
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

Product Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Add-On Storage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Storage Elements Capacity and Average Seek
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECArray300 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Noise Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1
1–2
1–3
1–7
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–16

2 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8

Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Sx300 Storage Array from the Pallet . . . . . . . .
Placing the Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling the Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting the Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repacking the DECArray300 Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-on Variation Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging Equipment for Storage or Shipment . . . . . . . . .

2–1
2–1
2–2
2–4
2–4
2–5
2–8
2–9
2–9

iii

3 Preparation and Installation
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.16.1
3.16.2
3.16.3
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27

Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Order Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Front Bezels . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Half Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Rear Access Panel . . . . . . .
Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Kick Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizer Plate (Weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Cabinet Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide Rail Plate Installation (RETMA Rails) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Position Guide Rail Plate Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Position Guide Rail Plate Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . .
Left Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . .
Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet . . . . . . . .
Cable and Power Cord Routing and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Sense Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Controller Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUS/OFF/ON Switch (S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Control Bus (Front Panel J10, J11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Sense Connector (J14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Controller Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
887–C Power Controller Cable (Cordage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1
3–4
3–6
3–7
3–10
3–10
3–11
3–11
3–13
3–13
3–13
3–14
3–15
3–15
3–19
3–20
3–21
3–23
3–26
3–29
3–33
3–33
3–33
3–37
3–37
3–38
3–39
3–40
3–40
3–40

4 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2

Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual-Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting the Storage Array (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling the Storage Array (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1
4–2
4–2
4–2
4–3
4–7

Labeling the Cables (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host)
.............................................
4.2.3.2
Filling Out the Labels (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3.3
Placing the Labels (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4
Powering Up the SF3xx Storage Array (Single-Host) . . . . . . .
4.2.5
Single-Host Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Inspecting the Storage Array (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Cabling the Storage Array (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Labeling the Cables (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.1
Completing the System Configuration Sheet
(Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.2
Filling Out the Labels (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.3
Placing the Labels (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3
4.2.3.1

4–9
4–10
4–10
4–11
4–12
4–15
4–16
4–16
4–17
4–18
4–19
4–20
4–20

5 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage
Array
5.1
Steps to Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Unpacking the SF7x Storage Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Where to Install the SF7x Storage Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3
Checking the System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4.1
Preparing the Sx300 Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4.2
Hardware Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Single-Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.1
Identifying DSSI Connectors on the System I/O Panel . .
5.2.1.2
Cabling SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.3
Cabling SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.4
Cabling SF4 and SF5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1.5
Cabling SF3 or SF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Dual-Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.1
Identifying DSSI Connectors on the System I/O Panel . .
5.2.2.2
Cabling SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.3
Cabling SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.4
Cabling SF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.5
Cabling SF4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.6
Cabling SF5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2.7
Cabling SF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
Powering Up the SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Updating the System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–2
5–3
5–5
5–5
5–10
5–11
5–11
5–14
5–16
5–18
5–20
5–21
5–26
5–28
5–29
5–29
5–30
5–31
5–35
5–37
5–39
5–41
5–43
5–43

5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5

Labeling the DSSI Cables and OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Out the Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling the OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–43
5–44
5–44
5–44
5–46

6 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage
Array
6.1
Steps to Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Unpacking the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Where to Install the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3
Completing the System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4.1
Preparing the Sx300 Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4.2
Hardware Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Single-Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.1
Cabling TF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.2
Cabling TF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.3
Cabling TF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.4
Cabling TF4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Dual-Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2.1
Cabling TF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2.2
Cabling TF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2.3
Cabling TF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2.4
Cabling TF4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
Powering Up the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1
Updating the System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
Labeling the DSSI Cables and Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . .
6.4.1
Filling Out the Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Labeling the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Labeling the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5
Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2
6–3
6–4
6–4
6–8
6–8
6–9
6–13
6–14
6–14
6–15
6–18
6–19
6–20
6–20
6–21
6–22
6–22
6–23
6–24
6–24
6–24
6–25
6–25
6–27

7 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage
Elements
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2

Site Preparation and Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA300/H9643 Cabinet System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Disk Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1
7–2
7–4
7–4
7–7

7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7

Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDI Cable and Power Cord Routing and Connections . . . . . .
Storage Element Voltage Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Element Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Power to the DECArray300 Cabinet System . . . . . .

7–8
7–8
7–12
7–12
7–12

8 Installation Troubleshooting
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5

Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing an Rx7x Disk ISE from an SF7x Storage
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing the Rx7x Disk ISE On-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Control Panel Fault Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Failure Influences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Error Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–1
8–4
8–9
8–11
8–13
8–13
8–14
8–14
8–16

A SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams
A.1
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.1.3
A.2
A.3
A.4

General Cabling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stripeset Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual-Host Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–1
A–1
A–2
A–3
A–5
A–6
A–31

B Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4

Securing the Array for the Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RF72 Disk ISE into an Sx72–HK Storage
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering Up the ISEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing the New RF72 Disk ISEs On-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–2
B–2
B–5
B–8

vii

C Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host
Configuration
C.1
Securing the Array for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2
Conversion Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.1
Through-Bus to Split-Bus Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.2
Split-Bus to Through-Bus Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.3
Single-Host to Dual-Host Cabling Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.4
Labeling the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.4.1
Completing the System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.4.2
Filling Out the Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.4.3
Placing the Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.5
Powering Up the Sx300 Storage Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.6
Bringing a Dual-Host Conversion On-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.7
Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–2
C–4
C–4
C–6
C–8
C–11
C–12
C–13
C–15
C–16
C–18
C–19

D Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems
D.1
Single-System Installation of an DECarray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1.1
Inspecting the Storage Array (Single-System) . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1.2
Cabling the Storage Array (Single-System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1.2.1
Example of a Fully Configured Single-System System . . .
D.1.2.2
Completing the System Configuration Sheet
(Single-System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1.3
Single-System Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2
DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.1
Inspecting the Storage Array (DSSI VAXcluster) . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.2
Cabling the Storage Array (DSSI VAXcluster) . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.2.1
Example of a Fully Configured DSSI VAXcluster
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.2.2
Completing the System Configuration Sheet (DSSI
VAXcluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.3
DSSI VAXcluster Final Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index

viii

D–2
D–4
D–6
D–8
D–9
D–12
D–12
D–14
D–16
D–17
D–19
D–22

Figures
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
3–1
3–2
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–6
3–7
3–8
3–9
3–10
3–11
3–12
3–13
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–7
4–8
4–9
4–10

H9643 Cabinet, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H9643 Cabinet Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Host System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual-Host System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three-Host System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp Installation on Shipping Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Array Removal from the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Leveler Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the Sx7x OCP Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECArray300 Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Bezel, OCP, Bezel Connector Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RETMA Frame Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Frame Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . .
Left Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Rails and Kick Plate (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Connector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
874 Power Controller, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
874 Power Controller, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seating the SF7x OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx7x Power Cords and Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magazine Tape Subsystem Power Cords and Voltage
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Terminators and Connecting DSSI Cables at the
System I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the OCP Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . .
Drive DC Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCP Indicators and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–5
1–6
1–13
1–14
1–15
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–7
3–3
3–9
3–12
3–16
3–18
3–22
3–23
3–25
3–28
3–31
3–35
3–36
3–37
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–7
4–9
4–11
4–12
4–13
4–14
4–15

4–11
4–12
4–13
4–14
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–4
5–5
5–6
5–7
5–8
5–9
5–10
5–11
5–12
5–13
5–14
5–15
5–16
5–17
5–18
5–19
6–1
6–2
6–3
6–4
6–5
6–6
6–7
6–8
6–9
6–10
7–1

Removing Terminators and Connecting DSSI Cables at the
System I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the OCP Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Three-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI ID Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the OCP on the SF7x Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive DC Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Switch, Voltage Selections, and Power Cord . . . . .
Single-Host Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual-Host Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for SF2 . . . . . .
Installing the 42-Inch DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for SF4 or SF5 . . . .
Installing the 42-Inch DSSI Cable (Position 1) . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for Position
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the 70-Inch DSSI Cables (Position 3) . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for Position
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the OCP Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Dual-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration Sheet (Three-Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Tube to the Weldment Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Switch, Voltage Selections, and Power Cord . . . . .
Installing the 42- and 70-Inch DSSI Cable (TF1) . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the DSSI Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . .
Installing Disk Drive/Cabinet Hardware, Front View . . . . . .

4–19
4–21
4–21
4–22
5–7
5–8
5–9
5–12
5–14
5–15
5–16
5–17
5–18
5–19
5–23
5–25
5–27
5–32
5–34
5–36
5–40
5–45
5–45
6–5
6–6
6–7
6–10
6–11
6–13
6–15
6–17
6–25
6–26
7–6

7–2
7–3
8–1
8–2
8–3
8–4
8–5
8–6
8–7
8–8
A–1
A–2
A–3
A–4
A–5
A–6
A–7
A–8
A–9
A–10
A–11
A–12
A–13
A–14
B–1
B–2
B–3
B–4
C–1
C–2
C–3
C–4
C–5
C–6
C–7
C–8
C–9

DSSI and SDI I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Element Voltage Selector Switch/Circuit Breaker . . .
Powering Down the SF7x Storage Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rx7x Disk ISE Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rx7x Wedges and Skid Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rx7x Disk ISE Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling the Rx7x Disk ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x Front Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with One SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Two SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Three SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Four SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Five SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Six SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with One SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Two SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Three SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Four SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Five SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 with Six SF7x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx72 Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF72 Disk ISE Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling the RF72 Disk ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx72 Front Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Single-Host System Configuration Sheet . . . . .
Changing an SF7x to Split-Bus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an Sx72 to Through-Bus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCP Indicators and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible Single-Host Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible Dual-Host Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DSSI Cables on the Sx300 I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . .
Blank Dual-Host System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–9
7–11
8–5
8–6
8–7
8–8
8–9
8–10
8–11
8–12
A–7
A–12
A–17
A–21
A–24
A–26
A–27
A–32
A–37
A–42
A–46
A–49
A–51
A–52
B–4
B–5
B–6
B–7
C–3
C–5
C–7
C–7
C–9
C–10
C–12
C–14
C–15

C–10
C–11
C–12
D–1
D–2
D–3
D–4
D–5
D–6
D–7
D–8
D–9
D–10

Placing a Label on the OCP Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem . . . . . . . . .
OCP Indicators and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible Single-System DSSI Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX 4000 DSSI Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-System Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-System Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible DSSI VAXcluster DSSI Bus Configurations . . . . . . .
Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX 4000 DSSI Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI VAXcluster Bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–16
C–17
C–18
D–3
D–5
D–7
D–10
D–11
D–13
D–16
D–18
D–20
D–21

Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECArray300 Cabinet System Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualified Add-On Storage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Disk or Tape Drive Formatted Capacity and Average
Seek Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 ADD On Storage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECArray300 Cabinet System Physical Specifications . . . . .
DECArray300 Cabinet System Electrical Specifications . . . . .
Cabinet System Environmental Operating Range . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet System Recommended Environmental
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Average Product Noise Emission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Average Product Noise Emission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification and Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Storage Element variation P/Ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Elements Repackaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Sequence Position of the Storage Elements . . . . . . . .
Specific Sequence Position of the DSSI Disk Storage
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Sequence Position of the DSSI Tape Storage
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sx300 Storage Element weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi
1–2
1–2

Tables
1
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–10
1–11
2–1
2–2
3–1
3–2
3–3
3–4
xii

1–3
1–4
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–9
1–10
1–10
1–11
2–9
2–10
3–4
3–4
3–4
3–30

3–5
3–6
3–7
4–1
4–2
4–3
5–1
5–2
5–3
6–1
6–2
7–1
8–1
8–2
8–3
8–4
A–1
A–2
A–3
A–4
A–5
C–1
C–2
D–1
D–2
D–3
D–4

Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Control Bus Logic Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
887–C Power Controller 220/240 Vac Power Cable
Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Host Colored Labels for the SF72 OCP Door . . . . . . . .
Dual-Host Colored Labels for the SF72 OCP Door . . . . . . . . .
SF7x Required Tool List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI ID Switch Settings (SF7x Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magazine Tape Subsystem Required Tool List . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magazine Tape Subsystem Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-on Kit content- CK-SA300-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Control Panel Fault Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Failures, Causes, and Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Host Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Overview Dual Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stripeset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Diagram Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Diagram List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI ID Switch Settings (Sx72 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Host to Dual-Host Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI Bus 0 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSI Bus 0 to DSSI Bus 1 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–38
3–39
3–40
4–3
4–10
4–20
5–2
5–4
5–13
6–2
6–3
7–3
8–2
8–13
8–13
8–15
A–1
A–2
A–4
A–5
A–5
C–8
C–10
D–4
D–9
D–15
D–19

xiii

Preface
This guide provides the steps to install Sx7x, RA9x storage enclosures and
magazine tape subsystems in the Sx300 storage array cabinet. The guide is
intended for Digital Multivendor Customer Services and for personnel qualified
to service the Sx300 storage array.
The information in this guide is organized as follows:
•

Chapter 1 contains a description of and specifications for the Sx300
storage array subsystem and Sx7x storage enclosure.

•

Chapter 2 contains instructions for the storage cabinet and the storage
elements such as SF72.

•

Chapter 3 contains general information about the Installation process.

•

Chapter 4 describes how to install one or two storage arrays in a singlehost and a dual-host configuration.

•

Chapter 5 describes how to install SF7x storage enclosures in an Sx300
storage array cabinet.

•

Chapter 6 describes how to install up to four magazine tape subsystems
in an Sx300 storage array cabinet.

•

Chapter 7 describes how to add SDI storage elements to the Sx300 storage
array.

•

Chapter 8 contains instructions for troubleshooting the installed Sx300
storage arrays, and the SF72 storage enclosure and magazine tape
subsystem upgrades.

•

Appendix A contains cabling diagrams for the Sx300 storage array
variations (DSSI) in both the single-host and dual-host configurations.

•

Appendix B describes how to install the Sx72–UK upgrade kit while
the host system and the disk ISEs in the Sx72–HK storage enclosure are
off-line.

•

Appendix C describes how to convert an Sx300 storage array, Sx72 storage
enclosure, or magazine tape subsystem.

•

Appendix D describes how to install the Sx300 cabinet.

Related Documents
Table 1 lists the related documentation that supplements this guide.
Table 1 Related Documentation
Document Title

Order Number

KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual

EK–KFMSA–IM

RA90/RA92 Disk Drive User Guide

EK–0RA90–UG

RF31/72 Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK–RF72D–UG

RA7x Disk Drive Service Manual

EK–ORA7X–SM

SA7x Enclosure Service Manual

EK–OSA7X–SM

SA7x Enclosure User Guide

EK–OSA7X–UG

SF72 Storage Enclosure Owners Manual

EK–SF72S–OM

TF857 Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual

EK–TF857–UG

Documentation Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:

xvi

boldface type

Boldface type indicates the first instance of terms being defined in
text, in the glossary, or both.

italic type

Italic type indicates emphasis and complete manual titles. In the
glossary, italic type is also used to indicate cross-references.

1
General Information

1.1 Product Descriptions
The DECArray300™ cabinet system is a storage array product with one to six
storage elements.
The DECArray300 cabinet system accommodates up to six RA90/RA92 ™ disk
drives, or up to 24 5 1/4-inch disk drives or up to four tape drives in mixed
configurations. The I/O panel Sx300 supports standard disk interface (SDI™ )
and DSSI™ interfaces. There are three I/O panels Sx300 supplied with the
cabinet:
•

Two I/O panels for SDI with each 24 slots.

•

One SDI/DSSI I/O panel with 12 DSSI and 8 SDI slots. The 12 DSSI slots
Sx300 support a maximum of 24 DSSI drives, dual hosting.

You can mount two I/O panels per cabinet. These are possible combinations:
•

Two SDI I/O panels to Sx300 support maximum 24 SDI drives dual porting
(48 SDI connections).

•

One SDI I/O panel with 24 SDI connections and DSSI panel with 12
DSSI connections and 8 SDI connections. This results in a total of 32 SDI
connections. 32 SDI connections Sx300 support maximum of 16 SDI disk
or tape drives dual porting. With the combination of the DSSI and SDI I/O
panel, it is possible to mix SDI and DSSI storage elements in one cabinet.

See Table 1–1 for a listing of available cabinets with their model numbers.

General Information 1–1

1.1 Product Descriptions

Table 1–1 DECArray300 Cabinet System Variations
P/N

Sx300
Storage Elements

Voltage

Capacity (GB)

SA300–CD™

with 1 SA72

220/240

SA300–HD

with 3 SA72

220/240

SA301–CD

with 1 SA71

220/240

2.8

SA301–HD

with 3 SA71

220/240

8.4

SF300–CD

with 1 SF72

220/240

SF300–HD

with 3 SF72

220/240

SF300–TD

with 1 TF857

220/240

18.2

SA300–XD

empty cabinet

220/240

SA300–CA

with 1 SA72

110/120

SA300–HA

with 3 SA72

110/120

SA300–CA

with 1 SA71

110/120

2.8

SA300–HA

with 3 SA71

110/120

8.4

SF300–CA

with 1 SF72

110/120

SF300–HA

with 3 SF72

110/120

SF300–TE

with 1 TF857

110/120

18.2

SA300–XA

empty cabinet

110/120

All 220/240 Vac versions are approved by TUEV Product Service.

1.1.1 Sx300 Add-On Storage Elements
See Table 1–2 for a list of the storage elements that can be added as capacity
needs increase.
Table 1–2 Qualified Add-On Storage Elements
Storage
Elements

Examples

RA9x

RA90/RA92

Sx7x

SA70/SA71/SA72/SF72/SF73/SF74

Tx8xx

TF857

1–2 General Information

1.1 Product Descriptions

1.1.2 Sx300 Storage Elements Capacity and Average Seek Time
The Sx300 storage elements utilizes Winchester disk technology or tape drives.
See Table 1–3 for a list of formatted capacity and average seek times.
Table 1–3 Sx300 Disk or Tape Drive Formatted Capacity and Average Seek Times
Storage
Elements

Formatted
Capacity

Average
Seek Time

Bus

RA90

1.216 gigabytes

18.5 milliseconds

SDI

RA92

1.506 gigabytes

16.0 milliseconds

SDI

RA70

0.280 gigabytes each drive

19.5 milliseconds

SDI

RA71

0.700 gigabytes each drive

12.5 milliseconds

SDI

RA72

1.00 gigabytes each drive

12.5 milliseconds

SDI

RF72

1.00 gigabytes each drive

13.3 milliseconds

DSSI

RF73

2.00 gigabytes each drive

13.3 milliseconds

DSSI

TF857

18.2 gigabytes

Tape Loader System for unattended
back-up.

DSSI

Note
The Sx7x storage element contains one to four 5 1/4-inch Rx7x disk
drives.

General Information 1–3

1.1 Product Descriptions

Table 1–4 Sx300 ADD On Storage Elements
P/N

Capacity

Installation KIT required

Cable Kit Required

RA90–NA

1 GB

CK–SA300–L2

None

RA92–NA

1.6 GB

CK–SA300–L2

None

SA70–JK

1.2 GB

CK–SA300–L1

None

SA71–CK

0.7 GB

CK–SA300–L1

None

SA71–JK

2.8 GB

CK–SA300–L1

None

SA72–CK

1.0 GB

CK–SA300–L1

None

SA72–JK

4.0 GB

CK–SA300–L1

None

SF72–HK

2.0 GB

None

CK–SF200–LM

SF72–JK

4.0 GB

None

CK–SF200–LM

TF857–AA

18 GB

None

CK–SF200–LM

TF857–AB

18 GB

None

CK–SF200–LM

Connecting the SF300 Cabinet to VAX4000™ Systems
By adding DSSI storage enclosures to a cabinet, which is connected to
a VAX4000, you will require the cable kit CK–SF200–LP instead of the
above mentioned kit.

Shipping Configurations—Single Host
The shipping configurations of the Sx300 cabinet for DSSI use are
cabled for single host connections. In order to update the cabinet from
single host to dual hosting, additional cable kits are required.

1–4 General Information

1.1 Product Descriptions

Figure 1–1 H9643 Cabinet, Front View

DRIVE 6

DRIVE 5

DRIVE 4

DRIVE 3

DRIVE 2

DRIVE 1

CXO-2725A

General Information 1–5

1.1 Product Descriptions

Figure 1–2 H9643 Cabinet Parts

END
PANEL
TOP
COVER

POWER
CONTROLLER

COMPONENT
LEVELS

END
PANEL
KICK
PLATE
KBO-2745A

1–6 General Information

1.2 DECArray300 Specifications

1.2 DECArray300 Specifications
See Table 1–5 for a list of physical specifications of the DECArray300 cabinet
system.
Table 1–5 DECArray300 Cabinet System Physical Specifications
Characteristic

Specification

Height*

106.68 centimeters

Width*

54.61 centimeters

Depth*

91.44 centimeters

Weight—unpacked (empty cab)

148.00 kilograms

Weight—unpacked (RA9x)

34.00 kilograms

Weight—unpacked (Sx7x)

40.00 kilograms (34 kg with 2 disks)

Weight—unpacked (TF8xx)

25.00 kilograms

Shipping cube (All variations)

106.68 x 76.2 x 168.91 centimeters
(41.6 inches front-to-back x 29.7 inches
wide x 25.9 inches high)

Calculate weight of the Sx300 storage array by adding the weight of the empty cabinet and the
storage elements accordingly.

Note
*The height, width and depth measurements are the same for all
variations because all storage elements are housed in an DECArray300
cabinet system with these dimensions.

See Table 1–6 for a list of system electrical specifications for the DECArray300
cabinet system.

General Information 1–7

1.2 DECArray300 Specifications

Table 1–6 DECArray300 Cabinet System Electrical Specifications
Voltage

120 Vac

240 Vac

Voltage range nominal

100–120 Vac

220–240 Vac

Input Voltage functional range

86–132 Vac

174–264 Vac

Inrush Current

235 A

150 A

AC–Plug type

NEMA L5–30P

P/N 12–14379–03

Power Controller

874

887–D

Circuit Breaker

30 A

16 A

Rated Current:

24 A

12 A

Tx8xx

1.73 A

0.9 A

Sx7x

2.22 A

1.5 A

Rx9x

3.6 A

1.8 A

Power Factor

0.6

Typical Current:

Typical current at nominal voltage. In order to calculate the typical current
of the Sx300 storage array, add the typical current of the storage elements.
The maximum current of the storage array can be up to 20 percent higher
compared with the nominal current.
The ride-through time is > 20 ms. That means that a voltage drop below the
minimum functional voltage range up to 20 ms will not have any impact on the
functionality of the array.
Note
A time lag fuse for the main voltage must be used to avoid the inrush
current blowing the fuse.

Table 1–7 and 1–8 list the recommended environmental operating ranges and
recommended environmental limits for the DECArray300 cabinet system.

1–8 General Information

1.2 DECArray300 Specifications

Table 1–7 Cabinet System Environmental Operating Range
Characteristic

Specification

Agency compliance

UL, CSA, and TUEV*

Temperature

+10°C to +40°C (+50°F to +104°F).
Derate 1.8°C for each 1000 meters altitude
(1.0°F for each 1000 feet altitude)

Humidity

10% to 85% @ maximum wet bulb
temperature of +32°C (+90°F) and minimum
dew point of +2°C (+36°F)

Note
*TUEV approval is only granted for the 220/240 Vac version storage
cabinets produced in Digital’s Kaufbeuren Manufacturing Plant (for
Europe).

Table 1–8 Cabinet System Recommended Environmental Conditions
Operating environment

Specification

Temperature

18°C to 24°C (64.4°F to 75.2°F) with an
average rate of change of 3°C/hour maximum
and a step change of 3°C or less

Relative humidity

40% to 60% (noncondensing) with a step
change of 10% or less (noncondensing)

Altitude

Up to 2400 meters (8000 feet)

Air quality (maximum
particle count)

Not to exceed 500,000 particles per cubic foot
of air at a size of 0.5 micron or larger

Air volume (at inlet)

50 cubic feet per minute (0.026 cubic meters
per second)

General Information 1–9

1.3 Acoustic Noise Values

1.3 Acoustic Noise Values
Product: SF300 (H9643 with 6xSF72, each with 4xRF72)
See Table 1–9 and Table 1–10 for a list of average product noise emission data
for the DECArray300 cabinet system.
Table 1–9 Sx300 Average Product Noise Emission Data
Average Acoustic Noise per ISO 7779

Idle

Op1

Op2

LNPE, bels:

6.8

6.9

7.1

LPA at the front bystander position, dB:

Average LPA at 4 bystander position, dB:

Product: SA300 (H9643 with 6xSA72, each with 4xRA72)
Table 1–10 Sx300 Average Product Noise Emission Data
Average Acoustic Noise per ISO 7779

Idle

Op1

Op2

LNPE, bels:

6.8

6.9

7.1

LPA at the front bystander position, dB:

Average LPA at 4 bystander position, dB:

•

LNPE = Noise power emission level (A-weighted sound power level)
measured in bels re 1 pw. (Note: 1 bel = 10 dB.)

•

LPA = A-weighted sound pressure level measured in dB (re 20 uPa) at a
bystander position: 1.0 meter from an edge (front, side or rear) of the unit
and 1.5 meter above the floor.

•

Op1 = Drives operating per ISO 7779 (1 drive seeking, others idling).

•

Op2 = Drives operating per proposed ISO 7779 (all drives seeking at 19
seeks per second).

1–10 General Information

1.4 EMC/EMI

1.4 EMC/EMI
See Table 1–11 for emissions. The cabinet meets the requirements of the
following standards and agencies.
Table 1–11 Certification and Immunity
Radiated/Conducted Emission

Class A Device
FCC/VCCI/FTZ

USA

FCC Class A

Germany

VDE Certificate, DBP Document

Japan

VCCI Grant

New Zealand

RFS Certificate of Compliance

Electrostatical Discharge

IEC 801–2 Level 4

Electrical Fast Transients

IEC 801–4 Level 4

Surge Immunity

IEC 801–5 Level 5

Susceptibility

IEC 801–3 <10V/m

Note
The equipment meets the requirements of the NAMUR Arbeitskreis
AK 05 EMV.

DSSI Signal Integrity
A ground cable is supplied with the Sx300 cabinet. It is mounted at the
rear inside of the cabinet. Connect this ground cable to the host system
for DSSI applications. This connection is to assure that the ground
voltage levels between host and storage enclosures will be equal. It is
required to assure optimum signal integrity.

General Information 1–11

1.5 Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation

1.5 Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation
The Sx300 storage array is intended for installation in a Class A computer
room environment that meets the conditions specified in Table 1–7.
Before installing the Sx300 storage array, make sure the following conditions
are met:
•

The Sx300 storage array requires 1-phase ac power. The phase draws up
to 12 amperes (230 Vac) or up to 24 amperes (120 Vac) in a fully configured
array.

•

Adequate space is provided around the storage array for access to front and
rear, for accessing cables at the rear of the storage array, and for adequate
airflow.

•

The installation site floor can safely bear the weight of the storage array. A
fully configured storage array weighs up to 330 kilograms.

•

The correct NEMA plug or IEC plug is available. See Figure 3–11.

•

The following is only valid for DSSI:
The system’s configuration sheet has been correctly filled out and is upto-date. Blank system configuration sheets can be found in Figure 1–3,
Figure 1–4, and Figure 1–5.
An adequate number of KFMSA modules exist in the extended memory
interconnect (XMI™ ) backplane of the VAX system to support all
the disk integrated storage elements (ISEs) in the Sx300 storage
array. Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual
(EK–KFMSA–IM) for more details.

1–12 General Information

1.5 Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation

Figure 1–3 Single-Host System Configuration Sheet

KFMSA/Single−System Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Color Code

Color Code
config_shr−x0109.rags

General Information 1–13

1.5 Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation

Figure 1–4 Dual-Host System Configuration Sheet

KFMSA/DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code

Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code
config_shr−x0133.rags

1–14 General Information

1.5 Sx300 Storage Array Site Preparation

Figure 1–5 Three-Host System Configuration Sheet

KFMSA/DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #
KFMSA XMI Node #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code

Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code
config_shr−x0133b.rags

General Information 1–15

1.6 Thermal Stabilization

1.6 Thermal Stabilization
Thermal stabilization prevents temperature differences between the disk or
tape drive and its environment from damaging the disk drive’s components.
CAUTION
The thermal stabilization procedure is mandatory. Do not open the
moisture barrier bag until the thermal stabilization period is complete.

Prior to installation, the DECArray300 cabinet system and/or add-on storage
elements must be stored at a temperature of 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) or
higher for a minimum of 24 hours. This equipment may be stored either in
the computer room or in another storage room under controlled temperature
conditions. If stored in another storage room, the equipment must remain for
an additional hour in the computer room in which it will be installed.
Refer to the Storage Element Manuals for details about thermal stabilization
of the storage elements.
After the thermal stabilization criteria have been met, carefully cut and
remove the moisture barrier bag. Proceed with the installation.

1–16 General Information

2
Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300
Storage Array
2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array
Before unpacking and placing the Sx300 storage array, make sure that the
site is ready to receive the array. Refer to Chapter 1 for site preparation
information and for array specifications.
This chapter describes the steps to perform the following:
•

Correctly unpack the Sx300 storage array (Section 2.1.1)

•

Remove the Sx300 storage array from the shipping pallet (Section 2.1.2)

•

Place the Sx300 storage array with the host system (Section 2.1.3)

•

Level the Sx300 storage array (Section 2.1.4)

•

Inspect the Sx300 storage array before installation (Section 2.1.5)

2.1.1 Unpacking the Storage Array
The Sx300 storage array is packed in a cardboard carton attached to a wooden
shipping pallet and sealed in a barrier bag with desiccant for environmental
protection.
NOTE
Before beginning to unpack the equipment, inspect the shipping carton
for signs of external damage. Report any damage to the local carrier
and either Digital™ Customer Services or the Digital sales office.

Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array 2–1

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Remember:
Retain the shipping container and all packing materials.
CAUTION
Failure to stabilize the equipment thermally may damage the drive
media or associated electronics when the unit is powered up.

Remove the outer shipping carton, but leave the sealed moisture barrier with
desiccant in place for at least 24 hours (thermal stabilization time). Thermal
stabilization begins when the equipment is placed in the room where it is to be
installed.
WARNING
Adhere to electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures at all times. Use
the ESD straps available with every storage array. The strap is inside
the rear door. See Section 3.3.

Once the storage array is unpacked, examine the front and rear, the right
and left side panels, and undercarriage for any apparent damage. Report any
damage.

2.1.2 Removing the Sx300 Storage Array from the Pallet
This section provides the procedure for removing the storage array from the
pallet and leveling the array. For personal safety, adhere to the following
WARNING before starting the procedure:
WARNING
Serious personal injury may result if correct safety conditions are not
met. During the unpacking procedure, personnel should wear safety
glasses. Inspect the ramps, ramp side rails, and metal hardware for
the following defects:
•

Cracks more than 25 percent of the ramp depth, either across or
lengthwise on the ramp

•

Knots or knotholes going through the thickness of the ramp and
greater than 50 percent of the ramp width

2–2 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

•

Loose, missing, or broken ramp side rails

•

Loose, missing, or bent metal hardware

If any of these defects exist, DO NOT USE THAT RAMP. Investigate
alternate means of removing the array or order a new ramp. The part
number for the left ramp is 99–07689–01; the part number for the right
ramp is 99–07689–02.

Use the following procedure to remove the array from the shipping pallet (see
Figure 2–2):
1. Remove the two unloading ramps.
2. Remove the cardboard carton and packing material.
3. Examine the equipment for physical damage.
4. Remove the shipping bolts (see Figure 2–1).
5. Remove the shipping brackets from the cabinet levelers.
6. Extend the ramp to its full length, and insert the steel dowel as shown in
Figure 2–2.

7. Position the unloading ramps on the pallet by fitting the grooved end of
each ramp over the metal mating strip on the pallet.
8. Screw the cabinet levelers all the way up until the storage array cabinet
rests on its rollers on the pallet.
9. Loosen the locking nuts on all four leveler feet.
10. Carefully roll the array down the ramps. Three people are required to
unload the storage array from the shipping pallet (see Figure 2–3).

Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array 2–3

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Figure 2–1 Shipping Bolts

LEVELER

SHIPPING
BOLT
SHIPPING
BRACKET

SHR_X1102A_89_SCN

2.1.3 Placing the Storage Array
Move the array to its final position—a distance not to exceed 0.9 meters (3 feet)
from any host system cabinet (for DSSI).

2.1.4 Leveling the Storage Array
Once the array is in its final position:
1. Loosen the locknuts on all four leveler feet (see Figure 2–4).
2. Turn each leveler hex nut clockwise until the leveler foot contacts the floor.
3. Adjust all four feet until the cabinet is level and the load is removed from
all casters. Verify that the casters spin freely.
4. Tighten the locknuts on all four leveler feet (see Figure 2–4).

2–4 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Figure 2–2 Ramp Installation on Shipping Pallet

LEFT
UNLOADING
RAMP

SHIPPING
PALLET

RIGHT
UNLOADING
RAMP

STEEL
DOWEL
RIGHT RAMP
ATTACHES HERE

EXTEND RAMP TO
FULL LENGTH

CXO-688C_S
SHR_X1103_89_SCN

2.1.5 Inspecting the Storage Array
Inspect the storage array first from the front, then from the rear.
1. Open the rear cabinet door.
a. Turn the two hex-Allen fasteners at the top edges of the rear door
counterclockwise to unlock.
b. For rear door, grasp the door by its edge, and pull toward you.
2. At the front of the Sx300 storage array, verify that all operator control
panels are correctly seated on each storage enclosure installed in the
cabinet (see Figure 2–5).

Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array 2–5

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Figure 2–3 Storage Array Removal from the Pallet

CXO-924A_S
SHR_X1104_89_SCN

WARNING
Adhere to ESD procedures at all times. Use the ESD straps available
with every storage array. The straps are inside the rear door. See
Section 3.3.

3. Check that the voltage rating of the power controller matches to the local
main voltage.

2–6 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Figure 2–4 Adjusting Leveler Feet

LOCKNUT

LEVELER
HEX NUT
LEVELER
FOOT
CXO-395C_S
SHR_X1105_89_SCN

Figure 2–5 Verifying the Sx7x OCP Seating

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

H
S
U

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1127A_89

4. Make sure that all ac power cords going to the power controller from
devices installed in the storage array are correctly seated in the power
controller.
Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array 2–7

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

5. Make sure that the ac breaker is off.
6. Make sure that the bus switch of the power controller is in the ON (down)
position.
7. Check the ac power cords for each Sx7x enclosure and magazine tape
subsystem installed. Make sure that each is correctly seated.
8. Make sure that the voltage selection switches for each Sx7x storage
enclosure and magazine tape subsystem are in the correct position for the
power supplied by the installation site.
9. Make sure that all interface cables internal to the storage array are firmly
seated.

2.1.6 Repacking the DECArray300 Cabinet System
Use the following procedure to repackage the DECArray300 cabinet system:
1. Place the barrier laminate on top of the original cushioned shipping pallet,
matching front to front.
2. Using the original unloading ramps, push the cabinet onto the pallet,
placing the cabinet on top of the barrier laminate, matching the front of
cabinet with the front of the barrier laminate.
3. Place 10 bags of desiccant under the cabinet, between the barrier laminate
and the cabinet.
4. Secure the cabinet to the original cushioned shipping pallet using the
original cabinet hold-down brackets and bolts. Screw the bolts through the
holes of the barrier laminate and into the T-nuts in the original pallet deck.
5. Place the antistatic bag over the top of the cabinet.
6. Place the moisture barrier bag over the top of the cabinet.
7. Fold over the moisture barrier bag and barrier laminate, then seal the bag
using waterproof tape.
8. Repack the cabinet using the original carton, cover, and shipping material.
Please refer to the storage element’s user guide (for example, SF72/SA72) for
details of unpacking and repacking of the storage elements. For the SF72
storage elements and the TF857 tape loader magazine (see Chapter 5 and
Chapter 7).

2–8 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

2.1.7 Add-on Variation Part Numbers
See Table 2–1 for the Sx300 add-on storage elements part numbers.
Table 2–1 Sx300 Storage Element variation P/Ns
Add-On
Storage Elements

Add-On
P/Ns

RA90

RA90–NA

RA92

RA92–NA

SA70

SA70–JK

SA71

SA71–JK (4 drives)

SA71

SA71–CK (1 drive)

SA72

SA72–JK (4 drives)

SA72

SA72–CK (1 drive)

SF72

SF72–JK/HK

TF857

TF857–AB

TF857

TF857–AA

Note
After receiving the disk or tape drive, check the packaging for external
damage. Read and save any packing information. Keep all packing
material and receipts in the event of equipment damage or difficulties.

2.1.8 Repackaging Equipment for Storage or Shipment
Should it be necessary to repackage equipment for storage or shipment, use
the original shipping containers in addition to the new materials listed in
Table 2–2.

Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array 2–9

2.1 Unpacking and Placing the Storage Array

Table 2–2 Storage Elements Repackaging Materials
Sx300 Add-On Disk Drive

DECArray300 Cabinet
System

Item

Quantity

P/N

Quantity

P/N

Moisture barrier bag

9908507–01

9908191–05

Barrier laminate

N/A

9908190–01

Desiccant

9906086–21

PE bag

N/A

9906104–20

Waterproof tape

As req’d

9908258–01

As req’d

9908358–01

Note
For the Tx8xx tape drive, you do not need the barrier laminate and the
desiccant.

2–10 Unpacking and Repacking a DECArray300 Storage Array

3
Preparation and Installation

3.1 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Order Sequence
When installing additional disk or tape drives in an DECArray300 cabinet
system, the storage elements should be added in a specific order. See
Figure 3–1 and Table 3–1.
WARNING
Failure to adhere to the disk or tape drive add-on order sequence can
cause cabinet instability, resulting in damage to equipment and/or
personnel.

The procedures for installing an add-on disk or tape drive depend on the disk
drive position and cabinet level in which the storage element is being installed.
In all cases, the disk or tape drive installation procedures describe installation
from the front of the cabinet.

Preparation and Installation 3–1

3.1 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Order Sequence

General rules:
1. DSSI has first priority. That means, you mount DSSI in accordance with
the storage array cabling diagrams (see Appendix A). Mount additional
SDI storage elements in the free slots remaining.
•

Start mounting tape elements top right position.

•

Continue to mount tape storage elements from top to bottom.

•

Start mounting disk storage elements in the right bottom position.

•

Continue mounting disk storage elements from bottom to top.

2. Second priority, if there are no DSSI storage elements:
•

Start mounting RA9x disk drive in positions 1-2 and 5-6 first. For this
position, use the chassis stabilizer brackets.

•

Mount SA7x storage elements in the remaining slots.

3–2 Preparation and Installation

3.1 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Order Sequence

Figure 3–1 DECArray300 Cabinet System

DRIVE 6

DRIVE 5

DRIVE 4

DRIVE 3

DRIVE 2

DRIVE 1

CXO-2725A

Preparation and Installation 3–3

3.2 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Positions

3.2 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Positions
Table 3–1 Specific Sequence Position of the Storage Elements
Storage
Element

Sequence
Position

Disk elements

first add-on in pos. 1–2; second add-on
in pos. 4–3; last add-on in pos. 6–5

Tape magazine elements

first add-on in pos. 5–6; second add-on
in pos. 3–4

Note
Although it is possible to install the TF857 in position 1-2-, this is not
recommended becuase the tape loader contains mechanical devices,
which might be sensitive to dust and high particle concentration. See
Table 3–1.

Table 3–2 Specific Sequence Position of the DSSI Disk Storage Elements
Storage
Element

Position

SF1–first SF storage element to install

Position 1

SF2–second SF storage element to install

Position 2

SF3–third SF storage element to install

Position 4

SF4–fourth SF storage element to install

Position 3

SF5–fifth SF storage element to install

Position 6

SF6–sixth SF storage element to install

Position 5

Table 3–3 Specific Sequence Position of the DSSI Tape Storage Elements
Storage
Element

Position

TF1–first tape loader storage element to install

Position 6

TF2–second tape loader storage element to install

Position 5

TF3–third tape loader storage element to install

Position 3

TF4–fourth tape loader storage element to install

Position 4

3–4 Preparation and Installation

3.2 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Positions

Example 1: Two RA90, one SA72, and two SF72 should be mounted.
•

First priority is DSSI. Therefore, mount the two SF72 to positions 1 and 2.

•

Second priority is the RA90. Therefore, mount the RA90 to positions 5 and
6. Use the chassis stabilizer brackets.

•

Mount the SA72 to position 4.

Example 2: Two SF72, one TF857, two RA92, and one SA70 should be mounted
in the cabinet.
•

First priority is DSSI. Therefore, mount the SF72 to positions 1 and 2.
Mount the TF857 tape loader magazine to position 6.

•

Second priority is to mount the RA9x to the top or bottom slots. Therefore,
mount the first RA92 to position 5. Use the Stabilizer brackets.

•

Fill the rest of the open slots with the SDI storage elements. For example,
you might mount the SA70 to position 4 and the second RA92 to position 3.

Example 3: There are two SA72’s mounted to the storage cabinet to positions 1
and 2. The customer would like to add one SF72 storage element.
•

First priority is DSSI. Therefore, the SF72 Storage Element should be
mounted to position 1. Remount the SA72 from position 1 and mount the
SF72 to position 1. Another possibility is to mount the first SF storage
element in position 4. Nevertheless, cable the first DSSI storage element
as SF1 and label it accordingly.

•

Mount the second SA72 to position 4 in case you mounted the first SF
storage element into Position 1.

1. Upper level disk or tape drive installation
When installing an add-on RA9x storage element to positions 6 or 5 of the
cabinet, it is necessary to remove the cabinet top cover. The drive chassis
stabilizer bracket cannot be removed from the frame and attached to the
upper level disk drive without first removing the cabinet top cover. See
Section 3.7.
Each upper level disk or tape drive is supported by two chassis retainer
brackets (top and bottom). Only for the RA90/RA92 you need one chassis
stabilizer bracket, and two (top and bottom) rear lock-down brackets
with one U-clip each. Detailed instructions for removing/installing this
hardware are found in Section 3.12 and in Section 3.17.

Preparation and Installation 3–5

3.2 Add-On Disk or Tape Drive Positions

Note
A DECArray300 cabinet system with only one Sx300 disk or tape
drive in positions 1 or 5 will have a 25-pound stabilizer plate (weight)
attached to the underneath of the upper cabinet H-stiffener. This is
required to fulfill the requirement of stability in accordance to IEC 950.
2. Center level disk or tape drive installation
When installing an add-on storage element, each storage element is
supported by two chassis retainer brackets (top and bottom).
3. Lower level disk drive installation
Before installing an add-on disk drive in the lower level of the cabinet
(positions 1 or 2), it is recommended to remove the cabinet kick plate
in Section 3.9. Each lower level disk drive is supported by two chassis
retainer brackets (top and bottom). For mounting RA9x storage elements,
you have to remove the cabinet kick plate and mount the cabinet stabilizer
brackets.
4. No more than two storage elements
Do not mount more than two SA70 storage elements per cabinet. You
might violate the FCC or VDE 0878 requirements.
5. EMC finger strips
Some of the SA7x storage elements might have EMC finger strips on top of
the chassis. The EMC finger strips are not necessary for the Sx300 cabinet.
For mounting top positions, remove the EMC finger strips prior to sliding
the storage element into the cabinet.)

3.3 Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is caused by the build up and release of static
electricity. An electrical charge from a person or object can damage hardware
components and result in premature device or option failure.
Use the following guidelines when handling static-sensitive components and
modules:
1. Read all instructions and installation procedures including the static
control materials and kits.

3–6 Preparation and Installation

3.3 Electrostatic Discharge

2. Wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when handling modules,
components, or static sensitive devices:
•

Make sure the wrist strap fits snugly for proper conductivity.

•

Attach the alligator clip securely to a clean, unpainted, grounded,
metal surface such as the drive or cabinet chassis.

•

Do not overextend the grounding cord.

3. Use static-protective containers to transfer modules and components
(including bags and tote boxes).
The ESD grounding strap for the DECArray300 cabinet system is attached to
the rear bustle inside the rear panel of the cabinet.
WARNING
Do not attempt the following procedures unless you have taken proper
precautions against ESD. Wear an ESD grounding strap with the clip
end securely connected to a known grounding point while removing the
storage element operator control panel (OCP) or other ESD-sensitive
components.

3.4 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Front Bezels
Remove the cabinet front bezel as shown in Figure 3–2:
1. Grasp the lower edge of the bezel, and place your fingers in the finger
cutouts (lower edge).
2. Lift up and pull forward. The top of the bezel should rock against the two
rubber bezel bumpers attached to the cabinet frame.
Note
Take care not to push the adjacent OCP out of place with the top edge
of the bezel during bezel removal. The operating disk or tape drive
may power down if this occurs.

Preparation and Installation 3–7

3.4 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Front Bezels

To replace the cabinet front bezel, see Figure 3–2:
1. Set the lower edge of the bezel in place, aligning the slots in each bottom
corner of the bezel over the bottom tabs of the clear plastic grille mounting
brackets.
2. Snap the upper portion of the bezel in place, pushing the bezel top into the
top tabs of the clear plastic grille mounting brackets.
3. Remove the cabinet front bezel to switch the ON/OFF dc supply voltage of
5 1/4-inch disk drives.

3–8 Preparation and Installation

3.4 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Front Bezels

Figure 3–2 Removing Bezel, OCP, Bezel Connector Cap

TOP COVER

PREFILTER
OCP

BEZEL
CONNECTOR
CAP

BEZEL
PREFILTER
CLIP

CXO-2726A

The bezel contains a prefilter (part number 12–13121–33) held in place with
six prefilter clips (part number 90–9748-00). Make sure prefilter clips are
properly seated before reinstalling the bezel after storage element installation.

Preparation and Installation 3–9

3.5 Mounting the Half Bezel

3.5 Mounting the Half Bezel
The half bezel is utilized when mounting only one tape loader or odd numbers
of tape loaders. Mount the half bezel using the following procedure:
1. Mount the half bezel bracket to the inner side of the tape loader.
2. Mount the tape loader to its final position.
3. Set the lower edge of the half bezel in place, aligning the slots in each
bottom corner of the bezel over the tabs of the clear plastic grille mounting
brackets.
4. Snap the upper portion of the half bezel in place, pushing the bezel top into
the top tabs of the clear plastic grille mounting brackets.

3.6 Removing and Replacing the OCP
To remove the storage element OCP:
1. Grasp both sides of the OCP and pull straight out.
2. Set OCP aside until disk or tape drive installation is complete.
To replace the storage element OCP:
1. Grasp both sides of the OCP.
2. Align the connector on the back of the OCP with the socket on the storage
element.
3. Push the OCP gently into place, ensuring that the plastic tabs and spring
clip on the OCP are seated in the bezel casting slots on the storage
element.
Note
This is valid only for RA9x disk drives.
The OCP should be at the top of the disk drive. If it is at the bottom,
remove the OCP by gently pulling it straight out. Turn the OCP around
and replace it in the top position. There may be a bezel connector cap
over the top OCP connector slot. If so, remove the cap before trying to
replace the OCP. Move the cap to the bottom connector slot, as shown in
Figure 3–2. The OCP of the tape drive should be on the right-hand site.

3–10 Preparation and Installation

3.7 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Top Cover

3.7 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Top Cover
Remove the cabinet top cover using the following procedure:
1. At the rear of the cabinet, remove the two serrated, truss-head, Phillips
screws from the underside of the rear bustle. Save these screws.
2. Lift the cabinet top cover up, then slide it back approximately 1 to 1–1/2
inches. This will enable the metal tabs on the cover to clear the cabinet
H-stiffener slots.
3. Carefully remove the top cover from the cabinet and store in a safe place to
avoid damage to the painted finish.
Replace the cabinet top cover using the following procedure:
1. Lift the top cover over the cabinet and rest it on the H-stiffener.
2. Align the top cover metal tabs with the two slots in the top of the cabinet
H-stiffener.
3. Slide the metal tabs into the slots.
4. Push the top cover forward until the screw holes in the top cover align with
the holes in the rear bustle. The top cover now should be flush with the
cabinet side panel profiles (top and front).
5. Insert and secure the two previously removed truss-head screws.

3.8 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Rear Access Panel
Many products use a rear bustle assembly with a rear access panel secured
with two quarter-turn hex fasteners, as shown in Figure 3–3.
To remove this type of rear access panel, perform the following procedure:
1. Unlock the two hex fasteners located at the top of the panel with a
counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
2. Tilt the panel toward you, and lift it up to disengage the pins at the bottom
of the panel.
3. Lift the panel clear of the cabinet system.
To replace the rear access panel:
1. Lift the panel into place and fit the pins into the holes at the top of the I/O
bulkhead.
2. Push the top of the panel into place and turn the two hex fasteners
one-quarter turn clockwise.

Preparation and Installation 3–11

3.8 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Rear Access Panel

Figure 3–3 Rear Access Panel
HEX
FASTENER

HEX
WRENCH

I/O BULKHEAD
REAR
ACCESS
PANEL

PINS

EXTERNAL
CABLES
CXO-2719A

3–12 Preparation and Installation

3.9 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Kick Plate

3.9 Removing and Replacing the Cabinet Kick Plate
When installing or removing disk or tape drives in the two lower positions
(positions 1 and 2), you must remove the cabinet front kick plate to install the
chassis stabilizer brackets, only for the RA90/RA92 disk drive.
Remove the cabinet kick plate using the following procedure and Figure 3–10:
1. Remove the two 10/32 pan-head Phillips sems screws that secure the
kick plate to the cabinet frame. Hold the kick plate with one hand after
removing the second screw, or it will fall to the floor.
2. Place the kick plate and its hardware in a safe place.
Replace the cabinet kick plate using the following procedure and Figure 3–10:
1. Slide the pointed tabs on the back of the kick plate into the cabinet
mounting bracket holes at the base of the frame. Note the kick plate tabs
slide up into the holes, as opposed to seating down into the holes.
2. Push the kick plate flush to the frame, then reinsert the two 10/32
pan-head Phillips sems screws.
3. Tighten the screws.

3.10 Stabilizer Plate (Weight)
To make sure the stability of a cabinet that contains a single storage element
in position 5 or 1, a 25-pound stabilizer plate has been installed at the factory.
The stabilizer plate is attached to the underside of the upper cabinet Hstiffener, and is fastened to the upper front and rear cabinet crossbars. It is
not necessary to remove the stabilizer plate after installing additional add-on
storage elements.

3.11 Ground Wire
An additional ground wire is shipped with the cabinet and mounted at the
rear. This ground wire is used to optimize the signal integrity. Connect the
open end of the ground wire to the target system to achieve equal ground
levels between storage cabinet and the system. This wire has to be used in
case the cabinet and the system are connected to different grounding systems
or different mains.

Preparation and Installation 3–13

3.12 Installing Cabinet Hardware

3.12 Installing Cabinet Hardware
After removing the bezel, half bezel, OCP, and cabinet rear panel, prepare the
cabinet hardware for storage element installation as follows:
1. Remove the two clear plastic grille mounting brackets. The brackets are
designated as left-hand (part number 74–37919–02) and right-hand (part
number 74–37919–01). Each bracket is secured with two 10-32 x 5/8
pan-head Phillips sems screws. Save these brackets and screws.
Note
A nylon washer is located in the hardware stack-up of the bottom hole
of the clear plastic grille mounting bracket. The nylon washer resides
between the grille mounting bracket and the cabinet frame. The nylon
washer maintains spacing for bezel alignment until the add-on disk
or tape drive retainer bracket is installed. The nylon washer can be
discarded after the storage element installation.
Be sure to reinstall these plastic grille mounting brackets after placing
the add-on storage element into the cabinet. See Section 3.17.

2. If installing an upper-level storage element, remove the cabinet top cover.
See Section 3.7.
Note
Only for the RA90/RA92 disk drive.

•

Remove the two 10-32 x 5/8 hex serrated screws of the associated
cabinet stabilizer bracket from the cabinet frame.

•

Attach the cabinet stabilizer bracket to the top of the add-on disk drive
with two 10/32 x 7/16 flat-head Phillips screws (from the plastic bag
that came with the RA90–NA/RA92–NA disk drive add-on kit).
The chassis stabilizer bracket position corresponds to the disk drive
position and level the disk drive will occupy. The chassis stabilizer
brackets for disk drive positions 5 and 6 attach to the cabinet frame
crossbar above the disk drives. The chassis stabilizer brackets for disk
drive positions 1 and 2 attach to the cabinet frame crossbar below
the disk drives. Disk drive positions 3 and 4 do not require chassis
stabilizer brackets.

3–14 Preparation and Installation

3.12 Installing Cabinet Hardware

3. Attach the top and bottom chassis retainer brackets (L-shaped brackets)
to the site of the disk drive using the short 10-32 x 3/8 pan-head Phillips
sems screws (from the plastic bag that is part of the RA90/RA92 disk drive
add-on kit). Two screws will be used for each retainer bracket. The chassis
retainer bracket has screw slots for mounting to the storage enclosure.
These screw slots are required to line up the SDI and DSSI devices after
mounting. After mounting the bracket, push the bracket towards the
storage elements for SDI devices. Pull it in the opposite direction away
from the storage element for DSSI devices. After adjusting the bracket,
tighten the mounting screws.

3.13 Guide Rail Plate Installation (RETMA Rails)
Note
Two types of guide rails are available: universal and Radio Electronics
and Television Manufacturer’s Association (RETMA).

Two round standoff on each end of the guide rail plate are used to locate
the guide rail plate along the cabinet vertical uprights. The round standoffs
are inserted into front and rear cabinet vertical upright mounting holes to
position the guide rail plate while it is fastened to the cabinet. Guide rail plate
installation procedures for both left and right enclosure mounting positions are
presented in Section 3.14 and Section 3.15.
If an ESD bolt is mounted to the vertical upright in your selected installation
position, remove the ESD bolt until your installation is complete, then fasten it
to an open space on the cabinet vertical upright.

3.14 Left Position Guide Rail Plate Installation
Install the guide rail plate in the left position within the cabinet as follows (see
Figure 3–4):

Preparation and Installation 3–15

3.14 Left Position Guide Rail Plate Installation

Figure 3–4 Chassis Rail Assembly
LOCKWASHER

FLAT HEAD
SCREWS

MOUNTING BRACKET

NUT BAR

SHOULDER
SCREWS

GUIDE RAIL
PLATE ASSEMBLY

LOCKWASHER

CABINET REAR
VERTICAL UPRIGHT

CABINET FRONT
VERTICAL UPRIGHT
CXO-4144A-TI

WARNING
Cabinet vertical upright edges may be sharp and can slice or abrade
skin or cable insulation.

3–16 Preparation and Installation

3.14 Left Position Guide Rail Plate Installation

1. Turn the cabinet power off.
2. This procedure installs an enclosure in add-on sequence position 6. Refer
to Table 3–1 to select the optimum add-on sequence position for your
installation.
3. Remove the rear access panel.
4. Remove the bezel filler that corresponds to add-on sequence position 6.
a. Refer to Table 3–1 to select the optimum add-on sequence position for
your installation.
b. Remove the four U-clips securing the bezel filler to the bezel.
c.

Remove the bezel filler.
WARNING

Use care in supporting the guide rail plate. It is heavy and awkward to
position within the cabinet. If possible, use two persons to support and
position the guide rail plate. The guide rail plate may cause personnel
injury if dropped during installation.

5. Install the guide rail plate in add-on sequence position 6. Add-on sequence
position 6 corresponds to mounting hole numbers 5, 12, and 18 as shown in
Figure 3–5.
a. From the rear of the cabinet, position the guide rail plate with the
mounting bracket to the rear, making sure that the arrow on the
mounting bracket is pointing up.
b. Insert the two front round stand-offs into the cabinet so that hole 12
becomes the center mounting hole in the guide rail plate.
c.

While supporting the guide rail plate against the cabinet front vertical
upright, extend the mounting bracket to engage the two rear round
stand-offs into hole numbers 6 and 19 on the cabinet rear vertical
upright.

Preparation and Installation 3–17

3.14 Left Position Guide Rail Plate Installation

Figure 3–5 RETMA Frame Mounting Hole Locations
HOLE 1
HOLE 5
HOLE 6
HOLE 12
6

5
HOLE 18
HOLE 23
HOLE 24
HOLE 30

3
HOLE 36
HOLE 41
HOLE 42

HOLE 48
HOLE 54

CXO-4062A-MC

d. From the front, insert and tighten the three shoulder screws and
lockwashers in mounting holes 5, 12, and 18.
e.

From the rear, insert and tighten the shoulder screws and lockwashers
in mounting holes 5, 12, and 18.

Tighten the four mounting bracket screws.

3–18 Preparation and Installation

3.15 Right Position Guide Rail Plate Installation

3.15 Right Position Guide Rail Plate Installation
Install the guide rail plate in the right position within the cabinet as follows
(refer to Figure 3–4):
WARNING
Cabinet vertical upright edges may be sharp and can slice or abrade
skin or cable insulation.

1. Turn the cabinet power off.
2. This procedure installs an enclosure in add-on sequence position 5. Refer
to Table 3–1 to select the optimum add-on sequence position for your
installation.
3. Remove the rear access panel.
4. Remove the bezel filler that corresponds to add-on sequence position 5.
a. Remove the bezel. See Section 3.4.
b. Remove the U-clips securing the bezel filler to the bezel.
c.

Remove the bezel filler.
WARNING

5. Install the guide rail plate in add-on sequence position 5. Add-on sequence
position 5 corresponds to mounting hole numbers 5, 12 and 18 as shown in
Figure 3–5.
a. From the front of the cabinet, position the guide rail plate with the
mounting bracket to the front, making sure that the arrow on the
mounting bracket is pointing up.
b. Insert the two rear round stand-offs into the cabinet so that hole 12
becomes the center mounting hole in the guide rail plate.

Preparation and Installation 3–19

3.15 Right Position Guide Rail Plate Installation

While supporting the guide rail plate against the cabinet rear vertical
upright, extend the mounting bracket to engage the two front round
stand-offs into hole numbers 6 and 19 on the cabinet front vertical
upright.

d. From the front, insert and tighten the three shoulder screws and
lockwashers in mounting holdes 5, 12, and 18.
e.

From the rear, insert and tighten the three shoulder screws and
lockwashers in mounting holes 5, 12 and 18.

Tighten the four flathead mounting bracket screws as shown in
Figure 3–4.

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)
Note
Two types of guide rails are available: universal and Radio Electronics
and Television Manufacturer’s Association (RETMA).

To allow the length of the chassis rail to be adjusted to fit the cabinet, one
end of the rail is extendable using a sliding rail bracket. One round standoff
on each end of the guide rail plate is used to locate the chassis rail along the
vertical cabinet rails. The round standoffs are inserted into front and rear
chassis rail locating holes to position the chassis rail while it is fastened to the
cabinet.
Note
Standoff location holes, front and rear, both sides, are holes 17, 35,
and 53 as shown in Figure 3–6. Two small ESD grounding posts are
provided with the cabinet. One is located on a front vertical cabinet
rail, and one on a rear rail. Should an ESD grounding post interfere
with the installation of the chassis rail, move the post out of the way to
any free hole on the cabinet.

3–20 Preparation and Installation

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

3.16.1 Chassis Rail Assembly
Before the chassis rail components can be mounted in the cabinet, they must be
assembled. Assemble the chassis rail components as follows (see Figure 3–7):
1. If it is necessary to reconfigure the chassis slide from metric to RETMA,
remove the two round standoffs from the top position on each chassis rail
and install in the bottom position.
2. Position the rail bracket against the chassis rail, as shown in the
illustration.
3. Fasten the rail bracket to the chassis rail with the unbeveled nut bar and 4
screws, as shown. Leave the screws loose enough to allow the rail bracket
to be moved along the chassis rail.
4. Install a U-nut in the groove near the end of each of the beveled nut bars.
The flat side of the U-nuts must be on the beveled side of the nut bar.
5. Install the beveled nut bars on the chassis rail and rail bracket, using the
round standoffs to hold them in place. The beveled side of the nut bars
must face the flanges on the chassis rail and rail bracket.
6. The chassis rail assembly is now ready to be installed in the cabinet.

Preparation and Installation 3–21

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

Figure 3–6 Universal Frame Mounting Hole Locations

HOLE 5

HOLE 17

HOLE 35

HOLE 53

CXO-4063A

3–22 Preparation and Installation

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

Figure 3–7 Chassis Rail Assembly

U-NUT, 10-32
(2 PLACES)

NUT BAR,
UNBEVELED

ROUND
STANDOFF

CHASSIS
RAIL
SCREW, 10-32
FH
(4 PLACES)

NUT BAR,
BEVELED
(2 PLACES)

RAIL
BRACKET

ROUND
STANDOFF

CXO-4145A-MC

3.16.2 Right Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation
Install the chassis rail assembly in the right position within the cabinet as
follows (see Figure 3–8):
WARNING
Cabinet rail edges may be sharp and can slice or abrade skin or cable
insulation.

Preparation and Installation 3–23

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

1. Turn the cabinet power off.
2. Determine the correct enclosure mounting locations and corresponding
cabinet rail mounting holes for the chassis rail assembly. Refer to the
chapter in this document pertaining to your specific cabinet configuration
for this information. The enclosure mounting hole specified for each
position is the chassis rail locating hole shown in Figure 3–8.
WARNING
Use care in supporting the chassis rail assembly. It is heavy and
awkward to position within the cabinet. If possible, use two persons
to support and position the chassis rail assembly. The chassis rail
assembly may cause personnel injury and equipment damage if
dropped during installation.

Note
To be sure of proper alignment of the chassis rail assembly, use care to
position the round standoffs in the correct front and rear chassis rail
locating holes.

3. From the front of the cabinet, position the chassis rail assembly at
the correct mounting holes, as shown. Be sure that the rail bracket is
positioned toward the front of the cabinet, and that the arrow on the rail
bracket points up.
4. Insert the rear round standoff into the rear chassis rail locating hole.
5. Support the chassis rail against the rear vertical cabinet rail and maintain
the rear round standoff in its locating hole. Extend the rail bracket to
insert the front round standoff into its correct front chassis rail locating
hole.

3–24 Preparation and Installation

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

Figure 3–8 Right Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation
REAR VERTICAL
CABINET RAIL

FRONT VERTICAL
CABINET RAIL

INNER
FLANGE

OUTER
FLANGE

INNER
FLANGE

U-NUT, 10-32
(2 PLACES)
SCREW, SEM
10-32 x .625
(2 PLACES)

CHASSIS
RAIL ASSEMBLY
RAIL
BRACKET
ROUND
STANDOFF
(2 PLACES)

SCREW, 10-32
FRONT CHASSIS
(4 PLACES)
RAIL LOCATING
HOLE
WASHER, LOCK
10-32, INTERNAL
(4 PLACES)
CXO-4146A-MC

6. Using the shelf bracket as a template, mark the four U-nut mounting holes
on the inner flanges of both the front and rear vertical cabinet rails. Make
sure to use the correct set of holes in the chassis rail.
7. Temporarily remove the chassis rail assembly and install four U-nuts along
the inner flanges of the front and rear vertical cabinet rails at the holes
marked in step 6.
8. Reposition the chassis rail assembly as directed in steps 3 through 5.

Preparation and Installation 3–25

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

9. Fasten the chassis rail to the inner flanges of the front and rear vertical
cabinet rails with 4 screws, as shown.
10. Fasten the rail bracket to the front vertical cabinet rail with its beveled
nut bar and three screws, as shown.
11. Fasten the chassis rail to the rear vertical cabinet rail with its beveled nut
bar and three screws, as shown.
12. Tighten the screws fastening the rail bracket to the chassis rail.
13. Install two U-nuts along the outer flange of the front vertical cabinet rail.
Install one U-nut at the hole just above the front chassis rail locating hole
and the other at the eighth hole below the locating hole.

3.16.3 Left Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation
Note
Install the chassis rail assembly in the left mounting position only if
an enclosure is also installed in the right position. The bezel openings
are designed to allow a single enclosure to be installed only in the right
position.

Install the chassis rail assembly in the left position within the cabinet as
follows (see Figure 3–9):
WARNING
Cabinet rail edges may be sharp and can slice or abrade skin or cable
insulation.

3–26 Preparation and Installation

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

WARNING
Use care in supporting the chassis rail assembly. It is heavy and
awkward to position within the cabinet. If possible, use two persons
to support and position the chassis rail assembly. The chassis rail
assembly may cause personnel injury and equipment damage if
dropped during installation.

Note
To be sure of proper alignment of the chassis rail assembly, use care to
position the round standoffs in the correct front and rear chassis rail
locating holes.

3. From the rear of the cabinet, position the chassis rail assembly at the
correct mounting holes, as shown. Be sure that the rail bracket is
positioned toward the rear of the cabinet, and that the arrow on the
rail bracket points up.
4. Insert the front round standoff into the front chassis rail locating hole.
5. Support the chassis rail assembly against the front vertical cabinet rail
and maintain the front round standoff in its locating hole. Extend the rail
bracket to insert the rear round standoff into its correct rear chassis rail
locating hole.
6. Fasten the chassis rail assembly to the inner flanges of the front and
rear vertical cabinet rails with four shoulder screws with lockwashers, as
shown.
7. Fasten the rail bracket to the rear vertical cabinet rail with one sems
screw, as shown.

Preparation and Installation 3–27

3.16 Chassis Rail Installation (Universal Rails)

Figure 3–9 Left Position Chassis Rail Assembly Installation
REAR VERTICAL
CABINET RAIL

INNER
FLANGE

FRONT VERTICAL
CABINET RAIL
OUTER
FLANGE
INNER
FLANGE

SCREW, SEM
10-32 x .625
(2 PLACES)

U-NUT, 10-32
(2 PLACES)

RAIL
BRACKET
SCREW, 10-32
(4 PLACES)

FRONT CHASSIS
RAIL LOCATING
HOLE

WASHER, LOCK
10-32, INTERNAL
(4 PLACES)

ROUND
STANDOFF
(2 PLACES)

CHASSIS
RAIL ASSEMBLY

CXO-4147A-MC

8. Fasten the chassis rail to the front vertical cabinet rail with one sems
screw, as shown.
9. Tighten the four screws fastening the rail bracket to the chassis rail.
10. Install two U-nuts along the outer flange of the front vertical cabinet rail.
Install one U-nut at the hole just above the front chassis rail locating hole
and the other at the eighth hole below the locating hole.

3–28 Preparation and Installation

3.17 Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet

3.17 Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet
The add-on storage element and the DECArray300 cabinet system hardware
should be ready for installation. See Figure 3–10 while performing the
installation procedure.
1. Turn the storage element so the side grooves are facing toward the cabinet
guide rails. (The storage element may look upside down at this point; this
will be rectified when the OCP is reinstalled to correspond with the disk or
tape drive orientation.)
2. Use the mounting brackets, part number 74–44414–01, for mounting
Storage Elements into the Sx300 Cabinet. These mounting brackets are
enclosed to the cabinet. The mounting holes in the brackets are adjustable
(long holes).
3. Push the bracket towards the front for DSSI storage elements prior to
tightening the mounting screws to fix the brackets to the storage enclosure.
4. Push the bracket towards the rear for SDI storage elements prior to
tightening the mounting screws to fix the brackets to the storage enclosure.
5. Lift and move the storage element into place using a Digital lifting device
(part number FC–10117–AC), and the following procedure:
CAUTION
If a lifting device is not available, two people are needed to install
the disk or tape drive into the cabinet. The disk or tape drive must
be handled with care. Manual installation is not recommended. See
Table 3–4 for all single storage element weight you can install in the
DECArray300 3 high cabinet.
a. Place the lifting device in an upright position with the lift platform
facing away from the operator.
b. Make sure sufficient open space for extending the lift platform.
c.

Support the top of the lifting device with one hand. With the other
hand, raise the lift platform holding latch from the cross bar to release
it.

d. Lower the lift platform to its service position.
e.

Check the hinges at the base of the lift platform to make sure they are
fully extended and locked.

Preparation and Installation 3–29

3.17 Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet

Release the safety strap and move it to one side so it will not become
tangled.

g. Move the lifting device to the disk or tape drive and center the lift
platform under the storage element. Slide the disk drive to the back of
the lift platform.
h. Secure the safety strap around the storage element.
i.

Lower the lift platform to no more than 12 inches off the floor.

Transport the storage element to the cabinet.

k. For more details, see Chapters 5, 6 and 7.
l.

Crank the lift platform up to the disk or tape drive installation level in
front of the cabinet.

Table 3–4 Sx300 Storage Element weight:
DECArray300
Storage Element

Weight
kilo

RA9x

34.0 kilograms

Sx7x

40.0 kilograms

TF857

25.0 kilograms

3–30 Preparation and Installation

3.17 Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet

Figure 3–10 Cabinet Rails and Kick Plate (Front)
GUIDE RAIL

DRIVE
REAR

RIGHT SIDE
MOUNTING
RAIL

CABINET
FRONT

RA90/RA92
DRIVE
CHASSIS
CHASSIS
STABILIZER
BRACKET

KICK
PLATE

10-32 X 5/8
PAN-HEAD
PHILLIPS
SEMS SCREWS
MOUNTING
BRACKET HOLE
CXO-2728B_R

Preparation and Installation 3–31

3.17 Placing the Add-On Storage Element into the Cabinet

Note
Make sure the internal SDI/DSSI cables and drive power cables are
clear for storage element installation.

m. Remove the safety strap from the storage element and slide it into
the cabinet, making sure that the grooves on the side of the storage
element align with the cabinet guide rails.
n. Move the lifting device away from the cabinet. The cabinet guide rails
will support the weight of the storage element.
o.

Slide the storage element completely into the cabinet frame.

p. Slide the Storage enclosure completely into the cabinet until the chassis
stabilizer bracket or the mounting brackets on the drive meets with the
holes in the cabinet frame.
q. Align the hole in the upper chassis retainer bracket with the hole in
the cabinet frame refer to Figure 7–1.
r.

Insert the 10-32 x 5/8 pan-head Phillips sems screw (from the add-on
kit bag) through the upper chassis retainer bracket hole and into the
frame. Screw down, but do not tighten at this time.

Align the previously removed, clear plastic grille mounting bracket(s)
to the frame. Loosely secure the bracket to the frame by placing the
pan-head screw into the top bracket hole.

Align the holes in the lower chassis retainer bracket (L-shaped bracket)
and the clear plastic grille mounting bracket with the hole in the
cabinet frame refer to Figure 7–1. Insert the 10-32 x 5/8 pan-head
Phillips sems screw (previously removed) through both parts (clear
plastic grille mounting bracket and the chassis retainer bracket) and
secure, but do not tighten, to the cabinet frame.

u. If installing disk drives in upper or lower levels, align the two holes in
the chassis stabilizer bracket with the threaded holes in the cabinet
(H-stiffener) frame (above drives 5 and 6, below drives 3 and 4). For
installing the Sx7x or the Tx8xx you don’t need the chassis stabilizer
bracket.
v.

Insert the two 10-32 x 5/8 hex serrated screws through the chassis
stabilizer bracket and into the frame.

w. Tighten all screws.

3–32 Preparation and Installation

3.18 Cable and Power Cord Routing and Connections

3.18 Cable and Power Cord Routing and Connections
The internal Storage element power cords have been factory-installed and
routed. SDI/DSSI cables are factory installed for the mounted storage elements
only. The SDI/DSSI cables have been connected to the cabinet I/O bulkhead
panel. The power cords have been connected to the rear panel of the power
controller.
Go to the rear of the cabinet. The storage element connections for both internal
SDI/DSSI cables and power cords are coiled and tie-wrapped at the factory.
Carefully cut the cable tie, then connect the SDI/DSSI cable connectors to the
proper port connections on the rear of the storage element.
The 110/120 Vac version of the cabinet are preconfigured with power cords for
all six possible positions.

3.19 Applying Power
This chapter describes the Sx300 storage element switches and power
controller power connector configurations encountered when installing a disk
or tape drive in an DECArray300 cabinet system. Brief descriptions of the
power controller switches, the storage element voltage selector switch, and the
circuit breaker are included.
This chapter does not discuss fault codes or error conditions incurred at
power-up. Please refer to the specific storage element manuals for such
information.

3.20 Power Controller
The power controller has six switched and two unswitched outlets (a total of
eight outlets). All variations include an ac line filter. The power controller is
19-inch rack-mountable.
The power controller serves four functions:
•

Controls large amounts of power from a remote source

•

Provides a convenient ac power distribution point for multiple units

•

Protects equipment from some electrical disturbances

•

Disconnects power (in case of overload) and provides circuit breaker
protection

Preparation and Installation 3–33

3.20 Power Controller

WARNING
High leakage current—earth connection is essential before connecting
power. Verify the integrity of the earth ground terminal of the power
receptacle before attaching the cabinet power controller cable and
applying power. If the continuity of the terminal-to-ground cannot
be verified, supplemental grounding to the cabinet system must be
provided.

Figure 3–11 shows the connector configurations for the power controller.
Figures 3–12 and 3–13 show the front and rear views of the 874-power
controller. The DECArray300 cabinet system utilizes the 874–D and 887–C
models.
The 887–C power controller is using IEC plugs at input and output.

3–34 Preparation and Installation

3.20 Power Controller

Figure 3–11 Power Connector Configurations
POWER CORDS GOING TO 874 POWER CONTROLLER
120V 50-60HZ
POWER CORD
DEC NO. A-PS-1700083-23
PLUG - POWER CONTROLLER END

120/240V 47-63HZ
10A/6A
POWER CORD
DEC NO. A-PS-1700442-18 OR
A-PS-1700442-19
RECEPTACLE - DRIVE END

PLUGS GOING TO WALL OUTLET (FROM 874 CONTROLLER)
120V 60HZ
24A
1-PHASE

NEMA NO. L5-30P
DEC NO. 12-11193
(874-D)

220/240V 50-60HZ
16A
1-PHASE
IEC 309 320-P6W
DEC NO. 12-14379-03
(874-F)

KBO-2731B

Preparation and Installation 3–35

3.20 Power Controller

Figure 3–12 874 Power Controller, Front View

POWER
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(SEE NOTE)

POWER
LAMP

J10

J11

J12

I
O
A

OFF

CORD
OPENING

POWER
CORD

O
A

B
LOCAL

REMOTE

REMOTE/OFF/LOCAL
SWITCH
NOTE: CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF POSITION (0) IS DOWN, ON POSITION (1) IS UP.
CXO-2732A

3–36 Preparation and Installation

3.20 Power Controller

Figure 3–13 874 Power Controller, Rear View

CXO-2733A

3.21 External Sense Connections
If external sense connections to another component are required, insert a
two-pin female (socket) MATE-N-LOK connector (DIGITAL part number 12–
10821–02 with connector pin sockets A–PS–1209379–0–0) from that component
into the mating male connector on the rear of the controller. (Only valid for
887–C P/C.)

3.22 Power Controller Indicators
The two basic controls on the power controller are the circuit breaker and the
BUS/OFF/ON switch. These and all but one of the other controls are located
on the front panel of the controller. Their functions are described in Table 3–5
and in the paragraphs that follow.

Preparation and Installation 3–37

3.22 Power Controller Indicators

Table 3–5 Controls and Indicators
Control or Indicator

Function

CB circuit breaker

Provides overload protection for the eight
output receptacles and control circuit.

BUS/OFF/ON switch

Controls ac power to the eight ac outlets
and selects remote operation.

BUS position

Enables remote control of ac power via the
Digital power control bus connectors.

OFF position

Removes ac power from the power
controller output receptacles and prevents
the power controller from responding to
power control bus signals.

ON position

Applies ac power to ac outlets receptacles.
Power control bus request signal is ignored.
Power control bus inhibit signal is valid.

EXTERNAL SENSE connector 2-pin on rear of
controller (only 887–C)

Isolates ac power from the output
receptacles. The circuit then must be
reset for normal operation by cycling the
circuit breaker off and then on.

Power control bus (3-pin)

Provides a means of controlling the power
state of a system from remote locations. A
switch closure between Pins 1 and 3 will
supply ac power to the output receptacles.
A switch closure between Pins 2 and 3 will
isolate ac power.

Sequenced power control bus (3-pin)

Adds a 0.5 to 2.0 second delay to the power
request line (pin 1).

Fuse

Protects the ac bus from control circuitry
overload.

3.23 BUS/OFF/ON Switch (S1)
The three positions of this switch are BUS, OFF, and ON. When the circuit
breaker to the power controller is ON, this switch controls to the ac outlet in
the following ways:
•

BUS position—Enables remote control of ac power via the Digital power
control bus connectors. The BUS position is intended for remote sensing
of Digital power control bus instructions. This position requires the use of
a remote sensing cable not shipped with the power controller. If you don’t
have this cable, or your application does not require the use of the Digital
power control bus, leave the switch in the ON position.

3–38 Preparation and Installation

3.23 BUS/OFF/ON Switch (S1)

•

OFF position—Removes ac power from the power controller output
receptacles and prevents the power controller from responding to power
control bus signal.

•

ON position—Applies ac power to ac outlet receptacles. Power control bus
request signal is ignored. Power control bus inhibit signal is valid.

3.24 Power Control Bus (Front Panel J10, J11)
WARNING
Do not rely on the Digital power control bus to isolate hazardous
voltages from the system. Use the circuit breaker to isolate all
hazardous voltages.

The power control bus both supplies and detects signals in response to sensors
and a master switch. Connections to the Digital power control bus are made
through the use of Digital power bus cables (Digital part number 7008288–0–
0). Pin 1 is the power request (requests ac power when the state of Pin 1 is
low), Pin 2 is the power inhibit (inhibits ac power when the state of Pin 2 is
low), and Pin 3 is the return (the states of Pin 1 and Pin 2 referenced to Pin 3,
not to ground). Use Table 3–6 to determine bus logic.
Table 3–6 Power Control Bus Logic Table
(Pin 1)

(Pin 2)

(Switched AC Power)

High

OFF

Low

High

Low

OFF

Low

OFF

Note
The number of bus controls attached to the power control bus must not
exceed 40.

Preparation and Installation 3–39

3.25 External Sense Connector (J14)

3.25 External Sense Connector (J14)
This two-pin male receptacle (J14) on the back of the 887–C power controller
attaches to Digital cable connector part number 12–10821–02 with connector
pin sockets A–PS–1209379–0–0. It removes power from the loads when
enabled by an external sensor. Conditions that a sensor may detect include
system over temperature or system air-flow loss. To engage the external sense,
plug an appropriate sensor (one that presents a switch closure in the event of
an out-of-tolerance condition) into the two pins on the connector. To reset the
external sense, cycle the circuit breaker off and then back on again.
WARNING
Do not rely on the external sense control to isolate hazardous voltages
from the system. Use the circuit breaker to isolate all hazardous
voltages.

3.26 Power Controller Circuit Breaker
The power controller circuit breaker has two positions: 0 and 1. The 0 position
represents OFF and the 1 position represents ON.

3.27 887–C Power Controller Cable (Cordage)
The 887–C power controller requires power connector cable replacement to
accommodate international power requirements and power connector plug
configurations. Table 3–7 lists the cable (cordage) part numbers for some
countries using 220/240 Vac power applications.
Table 3–7 887–C Power Controller 220/240 Vac Power Cable Variations
part number

Country

17–01255–01

Europe, U.S., Japan (IEC 309 plug and cordage)

17–00199–10

Central Europe (Schuko-plug)

17–00198–05

Australia

17–00364–06

Italy

17–00209–05

United Kingdom

3–40 Preparation and Installation

3.27 887–C Power Controller Cable (Cordage)

Note
All 887–C power controllers are shipped with part number 17–01255–
01 power cables in accordance with IEC 320. If the supplied cable
requires replacement, the installation team will order a suitable
version prior to equipment arrival. The original cable then may be
replaced and discarded.

Preparation and Installation 3–41

4
Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX
6000 System
This chapter describes the steps to install the SF3xx storage array in a
single-host or dual-host configuration. The SF300 storage array could be
connected to various VAX systems. This chapter uses the connection to the
VAX 6000™ as an example.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed. Refer
to Chapters 1 and 3.
Digital Multivendor Customer Services or trained installing personnel must
perform the step in the following warning.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are in the storage array and in the components of
the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.
Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

4.1 Configuration Overview
The SF3xx is offered in a number of variants to provide storage capacity from
2 to 24 gigabytes. Additional SF7x storage enclosures, and one or two TF8xx
series Magazine Tape Subsystems, may also be added to each variant.
This section describes the variants that are supported in single-host and dualhost configurations. Appendix A provides cabling diagrams for each variant
described in this section.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–1

4.1 Configuration Overview

All DSSI shipping variations are cabled for single hosts. See Appendix B for
recabling to a dual-host configuration.

4.1.1 Single-Host Configurations
In a single-host configuration, one tape integrated storage element (ISE) and
up to six disk ISEs can be connected to one DSSI bus. Table A–4 lists the
building blocks for each single-host configuration.
For further information on single-host configurations, refer to the KFMSA
Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).

4.1.2 Dual-Host Configurations
In a dual-host configuration, one tape ISE and, up to, four disk ISEs can
be connected to one DSSI bus. Table A–4 lists the building blocks for each
dual-host configuration.
For further information on dual-host configurations, refer to the KFMSA
Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array
This section provides the procedures for installing the SF3xx storage array in
a single-host configuration correctly and safely. Digital Multivendor Customer
Services or trained installing personnel must perform the procedures.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed. Refer
to Chapters 1 and 3.
The procedures provide the steps to do the following:
•

Inspect the SF3xx storage array for the correct configuration (Section 4.2.1)

•

Cable the SF3xx storage array to the host system in the single-host
configuration (Section 4.2.2)

•

Power up the SF3xx storage array after a successful installation
(Section 4.2.4)

•

Verify the SF3xx storage array for correct operation (Section 4.2.5)

4–2 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

4.2.1 Inspecting the Storage Array (Single-Host)
This procedure describes the steps to inspect the SF3xx storage array for
correct configuration.
Inspect the storage array from the front, then from the rear.
1. At the front of the SF3xx storage array:
a. Verify the correct setting for all the DSSI ID switches behind the door
of the operator control panel (OCP) of every SF7x enclosure installed.
Make sure that each ISE has a unique DSSI node ID for the DSSI bus
that it is on. By convention, DSSI node ID (0) is used for a tape ISE.
Disk ISEs should start with DSSI node ID (1) and sequence up from
there.
b. The Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) switch should be in the
down (enabled) position at all times unless you are instructed to change
it to the up (disabled) position.

Table 4–1 SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View)
SF1, SF2, SF4, SF5
001
010
011
100

Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)
SF3, SF6 in split bus mode
Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

101
110
110
101

Make sure that all OCP buttons are in the out position.

d. Make sure that the OCP itself is correctly seated in the SF7x enclosure.
To do so, place a thumb on either side of the OCP and press in. See
Figure 4–2.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–3

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–1 Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128B_89

Make sure that all drive dc power switches (lower half of the enclosure)
are in the out position. You have to replace the front bezels to do so.
WARNING

Adhere to electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures at all times. Use
the ESD straps available with every storage array. The straps are
inside the rear door. For details see Section 3.3.

4–4 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–2 Seating the SF7x OCP

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

H
S
U

SHR_X1127A_89

2. Make sure that the DSSI ID numbers of each magazine tape subsystem
installed in the array are set to 0 and that the Tape Mass Storage Control
Protocol (TMSCP) switch is enabled (down). Refer to the magazine tape
subsystem documentation for the procedure to access the DSSI controller
module.
3. At the rear of the SF3xx storage array:
a. Verify that the correct variation of the power controller exists to meet
the power supplied to the installation site.
b. Make sure that all ac power cords going to the power controller from
devices installed in the storage array are correctly seated in the power
controller.
c.

Make sure that the ac breaker is off.

d. Make sure that the bus switch of the power controller is in the on
(down) position. Make sure that the BUS/OFF/ON switch is in the
down position.
CAUTION
Make sure that all ac power switches on each storage element enclosure
and magazine tape subsystem are in the off position.

4. For each SF7x storage enclosure and magazine tape subsystem installed,
check that the ac power cord is correctly seated. See Figure 4–3 and 4–4.
5. Make sure that each SF7x storage enclosure and magazine tape subsystem
has the correct voltage selected for the power. Note that each has a voltage
label for its factory setting.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–5

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

6. Make sure that the voltage selection switches for each SF7x storage
enclosure and magazine tape subsystem are in the correct position.
7. Make sure that all DSSI connectors in the SF3xx storage array are firmly
seated.
Figure 4–3 Sx7x Power Cords and Voltage Selection

DSSI
CONNECTORS

1 0

AC RECEPTACLE

230

115

FAULT

AC POWER
SWITCH

POWER SUPPLY
FAULT INDICATOR
(BEHIND PANEL)

LINE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH
(BEHIND PANEL)
SHR-X0127A-90

4–6 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–4 Magazine Tape Subsystem Power Cords and Voltage Selection

DSSI
CONNECTORS

AC POWER
SWITCH

AC RECEPTACLE
SHR-X0141B-90-CPG

4.2.2 Cabling the Storage Array (Single-Host)
Start at the rear of the SF3xx storage array cabinet.
1. Plug the main power cable of the storage array into its power receptacle.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are contained in the storage array and in the
components of the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–7

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

2. Connect the 108-inch DSSI cable or cables (part number BC21Q–09) from
the array DSSI I/O panel to the system I/O panel.
a. At the system I/O panel, remove the terminator or terminators (part
number 12–31281–01). See Figure 4–5. Store these terminators in the
ESD pouch on the rear door of the storage array cabinet.
b. To determine which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel
to connect to:

•

Open the system I/O panel by removing the screws that secure it to
the system chassis. Let the panel swing down to its rest position.

•

Find the first KFMSA module installed in the system XMI
backplane. It is the KFMSA module in the lowest numbered
slot of the KFMSA modules installed.

•

Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.

•

While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI
connector on the right is KFMSA DSSI bus 1 and on the left is
bus 2.

•

For port 1 and 3 on the SF3xx I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI
cable to the right DSSI connector of the system I/O panel.

•

For port 2 and 4 on the SF3xx I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI
cable to the left DSSI connector of the system I/O panel.

Install one end of the 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) to
one of the ports on I/O panel at the bottom rear of the system cabinet.
See Figure 4–5.
•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 1 (of the I/O panel) to
the first DSSI connector of the first KFMSA bulkhead connector on
the system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 2 (of the I/O panel) to
the second DSSI connector of the first KFMSA bulkhead connector
on the system I/O panel.

4–8 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–5 Removing Terminators and Connecting DSSI Cables at the
System I/O Panel

LABEL AREA

DSSI TERMINATOR
2

SHR-X0121-90

3. Install the terminator or terminators (part number 12–31281–01) to their
correct position on the SF7x enclosures, magazine tape subsystems, and
system I/O panel.
4. See Appendix A for the need of terminators.

4.2.3 Labeling the Cables (Single-Host)
This section describes the steps to label correctly the cables for the host system,
the SF3xx storage array, and its SF7x storage enclosures and magazine tape
subsystems.
At this point, all steps in the previous sections must be complete.
Digital Multivendor Customer Services or trained installing personnel must
perform the steps that follow.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–9

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

4.2.3.1 Completing the System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host)
At this time, you should be ready to fill out the system configuration sheet.
Examples of these sheets are shown in Section 1.5 and in the KFMSA Module
Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).
Refer to these examples when filling out the system’s configuration sheet.
Note
Do not attempt to fill out and place the labels until you have completed
the system configuration sheet.
The information from the system configuration sheet is used to fill
out the labels correctly for all DSSI cables, enclosure OCPs, and
subsystems.
You can also refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet
(part number 36–32882–01) for instructions on how to fill out the
labels.

4.2.3.2 Filling Out the Labels (Single-Host)
There are two sizes of labels: the larger one for the DSSI cables, and the
smaller one for the inside of the SF7x OCP door and the system I/O panel.
Refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–
32882–01) for instructions on what information to put on each of the two types
of labels.
See Table 4–2 for the single-host configuration on the SF7x OCP door, the front
panel of the magazine tape subsystem, and all DSSI cables.
Table 4–2 Single Host Colored Labels for the SF72 OCP Door
Label Color

Port

Position

Blue

Port 1

SF1 and SF3 and TF1

Red

Port 2

SF2 and SF3 and TF2

Yellow

Port 3

SF4 and SF6 and TF3

Green

Port 4

SF5 and SF6 and TF4

SF3 and SF6 are in split-bus mode.

4–10 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Proceed once you have filled the cable and OCP labels according to the
instructions on the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number
36–32882–01).
4.2.3.3 Placing the Labels (Single-Host)
Now that the labels have been filled out, place them on the DSSI cables and
the SF7x OCP doors. Also place a label on the front of the magazine tape
subsystem.
On the DSSI cable, place the label 2 inches behind the DSSI connector. See
Figure 4–6.
Figure 4–6 Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable

LABEL

SHR-X0108-90

Place the SF7x OCP label as shown in Figure 4–7 and the magazine tape
subsystem label as shown in Figure 4–8.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–11

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–7 Placing a Label on the OCP Door

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

NNnNN
SHR_X1128C_89

4.2.4 Powering Up the SF3xx Storage Array (Single-Host)
Now that the SF3xx storage array has been installed and labeled, you are
ready to apply power. Follow the steps in order.
CAUTION
Make sure that the ac power switch on each SF7x storage enclosure
and magazine tape subsystem installed is in the off position.

1. At the rear of the storage array, turn the power controller on. Make sure
that the BUS/OFF/ON switch is in the down position.
2. At the rear of the storage array, turn on each magazine tape subsystem
installed (if present). Observe the front panel. If a failure occurs, see
Chapter 8.
3. At the rear of the storage array, turn on each SF7x storage enclosure
starting with position 1 and continuing in numerical order.
4–12 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–8 Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem

O P ER ATO R C O N TR O L P AN EL

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

Power On

DSSI
NODE
ID LABEL

Write
Protected
Tape In Use
Use
Cleaning Tape
Magazine
Fault
Loader Fault

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

0
Power On
Write
Protected

Write Protect
Load Fault

Tape In Use
Head Clean
Indicator
Drive Fault
Loader Fault

40% REDUCTION

SHR_X1025C_89

4. Press each drive dc power switch for each SF7x storage enclosure. Start
with position 1 and continue in numerical order. See Figure 4–9. If the
Fault indicator lights for any disk ISE, see Chapter 8.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–13

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

5. In order to access the drive DC power switch, you might remove the front
bezel of the cabinet.
Figure 4–9 Drive DC Power Switches
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

1. Observe the OCP indicators (see Figure 4–10).
a. Check that the TERM PWR indicator (behind the door of the OCP) is
on for all positions installed.

4–14 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

b. Check that the SPLIT indicator (behind the door of the OCP) is on for
SF3 and SF6 only.
2. Press the Ready button on the OCP (see Figure 4–10). The Ready indicator
flickers, then lights steadily green once the ISE is on-line.

Figure 4–10 OCP Indicators and Controls

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128_89

4.2.5 Single-Host Final Verification
Now that all the hardware installation, cabling and labeling, and the powering
up steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and
verify the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the host system.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
and the TF857 Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual (EK–TF857–SM) for
detailed information on how to proceed with verifying the correct operation of
each ISE that has been installed. In this manual, you will find the procedure
for establishing the communications between the ISEs, the adapter module,
and the system. You will also find the step-by-step procedures for reconfiguring
the system with its newly installed DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–15

4.2 Single-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Remember, each SF7x enclosure can contain two or four disk ISEs. Each
magazine tape subsystem contains one tape ISE. A fully configured storage
array contains 24 disk ISEs or up to four tape ISEs.
If at any time you detect a failure, see Chapter 8.
Once the verification is complete, the system is ready to be turned over to the
system manager.

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array
This section provides the procedures for installing the SF3xx storage array in
a dual-host configuration correctly and safely. Digital Multivendor Customer
Services or trained installing personnel must perform the procedures.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed. Refer
to Chapter 1 and Chapter 3.
The following procedures provide the steps to do the following:
•

Inspect the SF3xx storage array for correct configuration (Section 4.3.1)

•

Convert the storage array from the single-host to the dual-host
configuration. See Appendix C.

•

Cable the SF3xx storage array to the host systems in the dual-host
configuration (Section 4.3.2)

•

Power up the Sx300 storage array after a successful installation
(Section C.2.5)

•

Verify the Sx300 storage array for correct operation (Section C.2.7)

4.3.1 Inspecting the Storage Array (Dual-Host)
This procedure describes the steps to inspect the SF3xx storage array for
correct configuration.
Inspection the storage array from the front, then from the rear.
1. At the front of the SF3xx storage array:
a. Verify the correct setting for all the DSSI ID switches behind the door
of the operator control panel (OCP) of every SF7x enclosure installed.
Refer to Table 4–1.
b. The MSCP switch should be in the down or enabled position at all
times unless you are instructed to change it to the up or disabled
position.

4–16 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

4.3.2 Cabling the Storage Array (Dual-Host)
Start at the rear of the SF3xx storage array cabinet.
1. Plug the main power cable of the storage array into its power receptacle.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are in the storage array and in the components of
the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.
Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

2. Connect the 108-inch DSSI cable or cables (part number BC21Q–09) from
the array DSSI I/O panel to the system I/O panel.
a. At the system I/O panel, remove the terminator or terminators (part
number 12–31281–01). See Figure 4–11.
b. To determine which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel
to connect to:
•

Open the system I/O panel by removing the screws that secure it to
the system chassis. Let the panel swing down to its rest position.

•

Find the first KFMSA module installed in the system XMI
backplane. It is the KFMSA module in the lowest numbered
slot of the KFMSA modules installed.

•

Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.

•

While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI
connector on the right is KFMSA DSSI bus 1 and on the left is bus
2.

•

For port 1, 3, and 5 on the SF3xx I/O panel, connect the 108-inch
DSSI cable to the right DSSI connector of the system I/O panel.

•

For port 2, 4, and 6 on the SF3xx I/O panel, connect the 108-inch
DSSI cable to the left DSSI connector of the system I/O panel.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–17

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

3. Install one end of the 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) to the
I/O panel on the system cabinet (see Figure 4–11).
•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 1 (of the I/O panel) to the
first DSSI connector of the first KFMSA bulkhead connector on the
system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 2 (of the I/O panel) to the
second DSSI connector of the first KFMSA bulkhead connector on the
system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 3 (of the I/O panel) to the
first DSSI connector of the second KFMSA bulkhead connector on the
system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 4 (of the I/O panel) to the
second DSSI connector of the second KFMSA bulkhead connector on
the system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 5 (of the I/O panel) to the
first DSSI connector of the third KFMSA bulkhead connector on the
system I/O panel.

•

Connect the DSSI cable from the DSSI port 6 (of the I/O panel) to the
second DSSI connector of the third KFMSA bulkhead connector on the
system I/O panel.

4.3.3 Labeling the Cables (Dual-Host)
This section describes the steps to label correctly the cables for the host
systems, the SF3xx storage array, and its SF7x storage enclosures and
magazine tape subsystems.
At this point, all steps in the previous sections must be complete.
Digital Multivendor Customer Services or trained installing personnel must
perform the steps that follow.

4–18 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–11 Removing Terminators and Connecting DSSI Cables at the
System I/O Panel

LABEL AREA

DSSI TERMINATOR
2

SHR-X0121-90

4.3.3.1 Completing the System Configuration Sheet (Dual-Host)
At this time, you should be ready to fill out the system configuration sheet.
Examples of these sheets are in Chapter 1 and in the KFMSA Module
Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).
Refer to these examples when filling out the system’s configuration sheet.
Note
Do not attempt to fill out and place the labels until you have completed
the system configuration sheet.
The information from the system configuration sheet is used to fill
out the labels correctly for all DSSI cables, enclosure OCPs, and
subsystems.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–19

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

You can also refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet
(part number 36–32882–01) for instructions on how to fill out these
labels.

4.3.3.2 Filling Out the Labels (Dual-Host)
There are two sizes of labels: the larger one for the DSSI cables, and the
smaller one for the inside of the SF7x OCP door and the system I/O panel.
Refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–
32882–01) for the instructions on what information to put on each of the two
types of labels.
For the dual-host configuration, Table 4–3 lists the colored labels to be used on
the SF7x OCP door, the front panel of the magazine tape subsystem, and all
DSSI cables.
Table 4–3 Dual-Host Colored Labels for the SF72 OCP Door
Label Color

Port/Position

Blue

Port 1, SF1 and TF1, port 7

Red

Port 2, SF2 and TF2, port 8

Yellow

Port 3, SF3 and TF3, port 9

Green

Port 4, SF4 and TF4, port 10

Blue with white strip

Port 5, SF5, port 11

Red with white strip

Port 6, SF6, port 12

Proceed once you have filled the cable and OCP labels according to the
instructions on the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number
36–32882–01).
4.3.3.3 Placing the Labels (Dual-Host)
Now that the labels have all been filled out, place the labels on the DSSI cables
and the SF7x OCP doors. Also place a label on the front of the magazine tape
subsystem.
On the DSSI cable, place the label 2 inches behind the DSSI connector as
shown in Figure 4–12.

4–20 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–12 Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable

LABEL

SHR-X0108-90

Figure 4–13 Placing a Label on the OCP Door

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

NNnNN
SHR_X1128C_89

Place the SF7x OCP label as shown in Figure 4–13 and the magazine tape
subsystem label as shown in Figure 4–14.

Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System 4–21

4.3 Dual-Host Installation of an SF3xx Storage Array

Figure 4–14 Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem

O PE R A TO R C O N TR O L PA N E L

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

Power On

DSSI
NODE
ID LABEL

Write
Protected
Tape In Use
Use
Cleaning Tape
Magazine
Fault
Loader Fault

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

0
Power On
Write
Protected

Write Protect
Load Fault

Tape In Use
Head Clean
Indicator
Drive Fault
Loader Fault

40% REDUCTION

SHR_X1025C_89

4–22 Installing an SF3xx Storage Array to a VAX 6000 System

5
Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in
an Sx300 Storage Array
This chapter describes the steps to install the SF7x storage enclosure in an
existing Sx300 storage array:
•

Steps to install (Section 5.1)

•

Cabling the SF7x (Section 5.2)
Single-host configuration (Section 5.2.1)
Dual-host configuration (Section 5.2.2)

•

Powering up the SF7x (Section 5.3)

•

Labeling the DSSI cables and operator control panel (OCP) (Section 5.4)

•

Final verification (Section 5.5)

If you are attempting to install an SF7x in a cabinet other than an Sx300
storage array cabinet, refer to the host system documentation.
Only Digital Multivendor Customer Services and other installing personnel
that have been trained in ESD procedures should use the procedures in this
chapter.
Follow all the steps in this chapter to install an SF7x storage enclosure in an
Sx300 storage array. The steps apply for SF1 to SF6 in the storage array.
Table 5–1 lists the tools required to install the SF7x enclosure into the storage
array.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–1

Table 5–1 SF7x Required Tool List
Description

Part Number

Lifting device

FC–10117–AC

#0 Phillips screwdriver

29–10991–00

#1 Phillips screwdriver

29–11001–00

#2 Phillips screwdriver

29–11005–00

1/8-inch slot screwdriver

29–10802–00

5/16-inch slot screwdriver

29–10960–00

1/8-inch hex key

29–26115–00

3/16-inch hex key

29–26118–00

11/32-inch nutdriver

29–10674–00

See Chapter 8 for tools or equipment recommended for use when
troubleshooting after a successful installation.

5.1 Steps to Install
CAUTION
If a lifting device is not available, two people are needed to install the
disk or tape drive into the cabinet. The disk or tape drive must be
handled carefully. Manual installation is not recommended.

The following procedures assume that the existing Sx300 storage array is
correctly installed and configured.
The SF7x storage enclosure that you are installing may contain two or four
RF72 disk integrated storage elements (ISEs). To determine if the SF7x
contains two or four, simply look at the front of the enclosure. Remove the
front bezel of the Sx300 storage array. If you can see two disk ISEs in the front
of the SF7x, then the enclosure contains four ISEs (SF7x–JK variant). If you
do not see two ISEs in the front of the enclosure, then that enclosure contains
only two ISEs (SF7x–HK variant). If you wish to verify an enclosure that is
already installed in a cabinet or array, observe the number of seven-segment
displays that are lit on the OCP. If the top two displays are lit, then the
enclosure contains only two RF72 disk ISEs.

5–2 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

This section contains several major parts. (The first part explains the
steps to):
•

Unpack, inspect for damage, and identify parts

•

Determine where to install the SF7x enclosures

•

Read and fill out the system configuration sheet

The next part explains the steps to install the SF7x enclosure itself:
•

Prepare the array cabinet to receive an SF7x storage enclosure

•

Install the supporting hardware and SF7x, and set the DSSI ID switches

•

Cable the SF7x storage enclosure to comply with the DSSI bus cabling
conventions

The last part explains the steps to:
•

Power up the SF7x enclosure, run the power-on self-test, and run the
configuration programs

•

Label all cables and operator control panels

•

Verify the operation of the enclosure after a successful installation

Follow all the steps in each of these parts in the order they are presented and
do not skip any steps.
When the array is to operate in a single-host configuration, remember that the
enclosures SF1, SF2, SF4, SF5 operates in the through-bus mode. To be sure
that the SF7x storage enclosure you are installing is in the through-bus mode
after the installation is complete, observe the bottom indicator on the OCP. It
should be off. SF3 and SF6 operate in the split-bus mode and require you to
reconfigure their transition termination module (TTM). That same indicator
should be on once the enclosure is set for split-bus mode. The procedure to
accomplish this is presented later in this chapter.
When the array is to operate in a dual-host configuration, remember that all
enclosures operate in the through-bus mode.

5.1.1 Unpacking the SF7x Storage Enclosure
Unpack the SF7x shipping container. The enclosure is shipped in an
environmental barrier bag with desiccant.
Note
After unpacking, retain the container and all packing materials.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–3

5.1 Steps to Install

At this time, examine the enclosure for physical damage. If you find any
damage, do not attempt to install the enclosure. Notify your office immediately.
If there is no damage, then unpack all the boxes and bags, and identify all the
parts by using Table 5–2.
Table 5–2 SF7x Kit Contents
Description

Quantity

Part Number

SF7x storage enclosure

SF7x–HK (2-drive)
SF7x–JK (4-drive)

Slide mount assembly

–1

Shoulder screw, 10-32, 0.501

12–24007–01

Shoulder screw, 10-32, 0.438

12–24007–02

Lock washer, internal steel

90–06637–00

DSSI cable retainer

74–41302–01

Chassis retainer

74–35858–01

10-32 Phillips (SEMS)

12–21368–03

Machine screw, Phillips, 10-32, 0.500

90–06073–02

Machine screw, Phillips, 10-32, 1.5

90–06079–03

Lock washer, external steel

90–07651–00

AC power cord, 9-foot

17–00442–18

DSSI cables, 42-inch, box-to-box

BC21Q–3F

Owner’s manual

EK–SF7xS–OM

Installation guide

EK–Sx300–IG

Label booklet

36–32882–01

1 The slide mount assembly comes assembled and does not have a single part number.

Note
The chassis retainer and cable retainer of this kit are not used for the
Sx300 cabinet.

5–4 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

5.1.2 Where to Install the SF7x Storage Enclosure
The SF7x storage enclosures install in numerical order. Refer to Chapter 3.
SF7x storage enclosures could occupy positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 .
In split-bus mode, the following drives are part of the same DSSI bus (note
that split-bus mode is supported in the single-host configuration only):
1. Four drives of SF1 with the two left drives SF3
2. Four drives of SF2 with the two right drives SF3
3. Four drives of SF4 with the two left drives of SF6
4. Four drives of SF5 with the two right drives of SF6
Note
In a stripeset configuration, all SF7x storage enclosures must be in
split-bus mode. Each DSSI bus is connected to two ISEs in each SF7x
enclosure. One KFMSA module is required for each SF7x storage
enclosure.

All SF7x storage enclosures must be in through-bus mode when the Sx300
storage array is in the dual-host configuration:
1. Four drives of SF1
2. Four drives of SF2
3. Four drives of SF3
4. Four drives of SF4
5. Four drives of SF5
6. Four drives of SF6

5.1.3 Checking the System Configuration Sheet
Locate the system configuration sheet. If you cannot locate this sheet or if the
one that is available is either not filled out or filled out incorrectly, fill one out
immediately.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for an explanation of this sheet and how to fill it out.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–5

5.1 Steps to Install

Figures 5–1 and 5–2 show examples of the system configuration sheet filled out
for an Sx300 storage array with one magazine tape subsystem.

5–6 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

Figure 5–1 System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host)

KFMSA/DSSI Single-host Configuration Sheet

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID
Color Code
on Cables

Color Code
on Cables
SHR-X0109-90

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–7

5.1 Steps to Install

Figure 5–2 System Configuration Sheet (Dual-Host)

KFMSA/DSSI Dual-host Configuration Sheet

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

KFMSA XMI Node #

Color Code
on Cables

Color Code
on Cables
SHR-X0133-90

5–8 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

Figure 5–3 System Configuration Sheet (Three-Host)

KFMSA/DSSI Dual-host Configuration Sheet

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Tape
0

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
1

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
2

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

2
6

RF72
1

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

RF72
2

System ID

RF72
3

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Tape

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
3

System ID

RF72
4

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

RF72
4

System ID

Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

KFMSA XMI Node #

Color Code
on Cables

Blue

Color Code
on Cables

Red

SHR-X0133A-90

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–9

5.1 Steps to Install

5.1.4 Installation Procedure
Before attempting any of the following steps, make sure that the SF7x
enclosures installed in the array cabinet contain four disk ISEs.
To determine if the SF7x contains two or four drives, simply look at the front
of the enclosure. If you can see two drives in the front of the SF7x, then the
enclosure contains four drives (SF7x–JK variant). If you do not see two drives
in the front of the enclosure, then that enclosure contains only two drives
(SF7x–HK variant). If you wish to verify an enclosure that is already installed
and running in a cabinet or array cabinet, observe the number of 7-segment
displays that are lit on the operator control panel (OCP). If the top two displays
are lit, then the enclosure contains only two RF72 disk ISEs.
The procedure for installing the upgrade kit is in Appendix B.
This section describes the step-by-step procedures for installing an SF7x
storage enclosure in Sx300 storage array.
Be sure to:
•

Follow each step in order, and do not skip any steps

•

Leave sufficient room to perform the installation (approximately 1.5 meters
to 1.8 meters [5 feet to 6 feet] front and rear of the array)
WARNING
Observe all ESD precautions and procedures. An anti static wrist strap
is inside the front and rear doors.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to pick up or support the SF7x by the handle in the
rear of the enclosure. Doing so will injure the person attempting the
installation or damage the power supply.
To maintain stability, extend only one SF7x storage enclosure or
magazine tape subsystem on the slide mounts at a time.

5–10 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

5.1.4.1 Preparing the Sx300 Storage Array
The following procedure describes how to prepare the array to receive the SF7x
storage enclosure(s):
1. Place the SF7x to be installed to one side, in front of the array cabinet.
2. Open the front and rear bezels of the storage array.
5.1.4.2 Hardware Installation Procedures
Perform the following steps in full and in the order presented.
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.

1. Install the ac power cord (only for 220/240 Vac version):
a. Go to rear of cabinet. Open the Back panel by loosening the two captive
screws on the top.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

b. Leave approximately 0.6 meter (2 feet) of slack at the position location.
c.

Connect the male end of the ac power cord to the first available outlet
on the power controller.

d. Install the slide mount and associated hardware. Refer to Figure 3–9
and Chapter 3.
2. Position the OCP.
a. Adjust the SF7x OCP mount, Figure 5–4, to the LEFT for positions
SF1, SF4, SF6 and to the RIGHT for positions SF2, SF3, SF5.
b. Check that this and all other OCPs and magazine tape subsystem
fronts project through the front bezels of the storage array correctly.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–11

5.1 Steps to Install

Figure 5–4 Adjusting the OCP

SLOTTED
HOLE

SCREWS

HOLE FOR
RIGHT
POSITION

HOLE FOR
LEFT
POSITION

SLOTTED
HOLE

TRANSITION
BOARD

TRANSITION
BOARD
(BEHIND FRAME)
SHR-X0124-90

3. Check the DSSI ID switches on the OCP.
Open the door on the front of the OCP. Make sure that the DSSI ID
switches (the three rightmost switches) are set according to Figure 5–5.
If they are not, then use a pointed instrument to set the switches to their
correct configuration. See Table 5–3.
Note
The leftmost switch (Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP)) should in
the down or enabled position at all times, unless you are instructed to
change it to the up or disabled position.

5–12 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.1 Steps to Install

Table 5–3 DSSI ID Switch Settings (SF7x Only)
SF1, SF2, SF4, SF51
Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

001
010
011
100

SF3, SF6 in split bus mode (Single-Host Only)1
Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

101
110
110
101

1 The switch settings for OCPs in these positions are 0 = down and 1 = up.

CAUTION
Observe all ESD precautions and procedures.
An antistatic wrist strap is inside the front and rear doors.

4. Install the OCP (see Figure 5–6).
Note
Make sure that the power if off to the enclosure.
Make sure that ALL the buttons are in the out position.

5. At the front of the SF7x enclosure, make sure that all four (4) drive dc
power switches are out (see Figure 5–7).
6. At the rear of the SF7x enclosure, make sure that the ac power switch is in
off or in the 0 position (see Figure 5–8).

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–13

5.1 Steps to Install

Figure 5–5 DSSI ID Switch Settings

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128B_89

7. Also check the select line voltage. Set it to the correct setting for your
application.
8. At this time, connect the ac power cord to the SF7x enclosure.

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position
This section describes the step-by-step procedure to cable the SF7x storage
enclosure that you just installed to the existing DSSI bus configuration of the
Sx300 storage array.

5–14 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–6 Installing the OCP on the SF7x Enclosure

TTM CLIP
FASTENERS
FRONT
COVER

OCP
CONNECTOR
PINS

ESD
WRIST
STRAP

OPERATOR
CONTROL
PANEL
SHR_X1113_89_SCN

See Section 5.2.1 for instructions on how to cable the SF7x storage enclosure
in an Sx300 storage array configured for single-host. See Section 5.2.2 for
instructions on how to cable the SF7x storage enclosure in an Sx300 storage
array configured for dual-host.
Once the cabling of the Sx300 storage array is complete, each bus must be
connected to match one of the following eight buses. Figure 5–9 shows the five
possible single-host configurations, and Figure 5–10 shows the three possible
dual-host configurations.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–15

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–7 Drive DC Power Switches

OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

5.2.1 Single-Host Configuration
Use the following procedures for cabling an SF7x storage enclosure in an
existing Sx300 storage array configured for single-host.

5–16 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–8 AC Power Switch, Voltage Selections, and Power Cord

DSSI
CONNECTORS

1 0

AC RECEPTACLE

AC POWER
SWITCH

230

115

FAULT
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT INDICATOR
(BEHIND PANEL)

LINE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH
(BEHIND PANEL)
SHR-X0127A-90

The following procedures assume that all devices installed previous to a
new installation of an SF7x storage enclosure are cabled in the single-host
configuration.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–17

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–9 Single-Host Bus Configurations

Magazine

SF72

Sx300 I/O

Tape

PORT

Subsystem

Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

Magazine
PORT

Subsystem
T

42-inch

BC21Q-3F

Tape

42-inch

Sx300 I/O

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

42-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-3F

DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

Magazine
Sx300 I/O

Tape

PORT

Subsystem
T

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

DSSI TERMINATOR

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

12-31281-01

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Sx300 I/O
PORT

D
SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

42-inch
D

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Sx300 I/O
PORT

D
SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

D
DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

SHR-X0167-90

5.2.1.1 Identifying DSSI Connectors on the System I/O Panel
The following procedure explains how to locate and identify the DSSI
connections on the host system I/O panel.

5–18 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–10 Dual-Host Bus Configurations

Sx300 I/O

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

SF72

Sx300 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

PORT

42-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-3F

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

Magazine
Sx300 I/O

Tape

Sx300 I/O

PORT

Subsystem

PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SF72
Sx300 I/O

Sx300 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

PORT
70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SHR-X0168-90

WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the systems
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

Note
This procedure assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are installed
internally in the system cabinet. If SF7x storage enclosures are in the
system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA modules in the system XMI
backplane must be connected to those SF7x storage enclosures. Do
NOT use this KFMSA module or its DSSI connections to connect the
system to the Sx300 storage array. Do NOT count this KFMSA module
in the following steps.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–19

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

1. Open the system I/O panel on the system by removing the screws that
secure the I/O panel to the system chassis. Let the panel swing down to its
rest position.
2. Find the first KFMSA module installed in the XMI backplane of the
system. It will be the KFMSA module in the lowest numbered slot of the
XMI backplane.
3. Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.
4. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the left is KFMSA DSSI bus 2 and the DSSI connector on the right is
KFMSA DSSI bus 1. These connectors should be labeled BLUE for bus 1
and RED for bus 2.
5. Find the next KFMSA module installed in the XMI backplane of the
system. It will be the next KFMSA module after the KFMSA module in the
lowest numbered slot of the XMI backplane.
6. Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.
7. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the left is KFMSA DSSI bus 2 and the DSSI connector on the right is
KFMSA DSSI bus 1. These connectors should be labeled YELLOW for bus
1 and GREEN for bus 2.
If these connectors are not labeled, label them now with the small colored
labels in the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–32882–01).
For the single-host configuration, use the BLUE, RED, YELLOW, and GREEN
labels only.
5.2.1.2 Cabling SF1
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF1 with a magazine tape subsystem TF1:
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

5–20 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

1. Remove the DSSI terminator from the bottom DSSI connector on the rear
of the magazine tape subsystem in position 5.
2. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) in the bottom DSSI
connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF1.
3. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet. Cabling the
magazine tape subsystem should make sure that the correct cable slack
will be provided.
4. Connect the 42-inch DSSI cable from the bottom DSSI connector on the
rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF1 to the rightmost DSSI connector
on the rear of the SF7x storage enclosure SF1.
Note
Perform the next step if this is the only SF7x storage enclosure to
be installed on this particular DSSI bus. If not, then proceed to the
cabling instructions for the next SF7x storage enclosure that has been
installed.

5. Install a DSSI terminator in the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the
SF7x.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x storage enclosure at this time.

5.2.1.3 Cabling SF2
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.
The SF7x storage enclosure installed as SF2 of the Sx300 storage array
has two possible cabling configurations. The difference depends on
whether a magazine tape subsystem is installed (TF2) of the Sx300
storage array.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–21

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

The following steps are for cabling SF2 without a magazine tape subsystem
(TF2):
1. At the rear of the Sx300 storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the
bottom. Use a 3/16-inch flatblade screwdriver to loosen the two captive
screws at the right of the panel.
2. Swing open and remove the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R-5L).Secure this cable to
the I/O panel with two Phillips screws. See Figure 5–11.
4. Plug the other end of this cable into the rightmost DSSI connector at the
rear of the SF7x storage enclosure (SF2).
5. Route this DSSI cable under on the left side of the cabinet.
6. Plug a 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) into the DSSI cable
you just installed in port 2. Tighten the retainer screws with your fingers.
Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its
DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cable into the appropriate port on
the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine which
of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled BLUE and
RED.

5–22 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–11 Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for SF2

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

b. From port 2 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the left DSSI connector (RED) of the first system I/O panel.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x storage enclosure at this time.

Note
Perform the next step if this is the only SF7x storage enclosure to
be installed on this particular DSSI bus. If not, then proceed to the
cabling instructions for the next SF7x storage enclosure that has been
installed.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–23

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

8. Install a DSSI terminator in the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the
SF7x.
9. Replace the Sx300 I/O panel to its original position and secure it by
tightening the two right captive screws.
The following steps are for cabling SF2 with a magazine tape subsystem (TF2):
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

1. Remove the DSSI terminator from the bottom DSSI connector on the rear
of the magazine tape subsystem TF2.
2. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) in the bottom
DSSI connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF2 (see
Figure 5–12).
3. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet. Cabling the magazine
tape subsystem makes sure that the correct cable slack will be provided
when the inner assembly is pushed back into the extrusion tube.
4. Push the inner assembly of the magazine tape subsystem back into the
extrusion tube.
5. Connect the 42-inch DSSI cable from the bottom DSSI connector on the
rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF2 to the rightmost DSSI connector
on the rear of the SF7x storage enclosure SF2.
Note
Perform the next step if this is the only SF7x storage enclosure to
be installed on this particular DSSI bus. If not, then proceed to the
cabling instructions for the next SF7x storage enclosure that has been
installed.

6. Install a DSSI terminator in the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the
SF7x.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x storage enclosure at this time.

5–24 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–12 Installing the 42-Inch DSSI Cable

DSSI
CONNECTORS

1 0

AC RECEPTACLE

AC POWER
SWITCH

230

115

FAULT
POWER SUPPLY
FAULT INDICATOR
(BEHIND PANEL)

LINE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH
(BEHIND PANEL)
SHR-X0127A-90

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–25

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

5.2.1.4 Cabling SF4 and SF5
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF4 and SF5:
1. At the rear of the Sx300 storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the
bottom.
2. Swing open and remove the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L). Secure this cable to
the I/O panel with the two Phillips screws. See Figure 5–13.
4. Plug the other end of the 70-inch DSSI cable into the rightmost DSSI
connector at the rear of the SF7x storage enclosure, in either SF4 or SF5.
5. Route this DSSI cable on the appropriate side of the cabinet, left side for
SF4 , and right side for SF5.
6. Plug a 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) into the port you
just installed in the previous steps (see Figure 5–13). Tighten the retainer
screws on the 108-inch DSSI cable with your fingers.
Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its
DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

5–26 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–13 Installing 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for SF4 or SF5

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate port on
the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine which
of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled YELLOW
and GREEN.
b. For port 3 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (YELLOW) of the first system I/O panel.
c.

For port 4 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (GREEN) of the first system I/O panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the SF7x storage enclosure at this time.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–27

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

8. Install a DSSI terminator in the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the
SF7x storage enclosure in SF4 and SF5.
9. Replace the Sx300 I/O panel to its original position and secure it by
tightening the two right captive screws.
5.2.1.5 Cabling SF3 or SF6
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, perform an orderly shutdown of
the system that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

The following steps describe cabling for SF3 and SF6. Note that SF3 and SF6
operate in split-bus mode for a single-host configuration.
1. Power down the SF7x storage enclosures SF1 and SF2 if you are installing
SF3. Power down the SF7x storage enclosures SF4 and SF5 if you are
installing SF6. To power down an enclosure, first press the Ready button
for each ISE, then press each drive dc power switch (one at a time), and
finally at the rear of the enclosure press the ac power switch to 0.
2. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the rightmost
DSSI connector on the rear of the SF7x storage enclosure SF3 and SF5.
3. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet for SF3. For SF6,
route this cable above the SF7x storage enclosures in SF4 and SF5.
4. For SF3, connect this 42-inch DSSI cable to the leftmost DSSI connector at
the rear of the SF7x SF1. For SF6, connect this 42-inch DSSI cable to the
leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF75.
5. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the leftmost DSSI
connector on the rear of the SF6 and SF3.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet SF3 and on the right
side of the cabinet for SF6

5–28 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

7. For SF3, connect this 42-inch DSSI cable to the leftmost DSSI connector at
the rear of the SF7x SF2. For SF6, connect this 42-inch DSSI cable to the
leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF7x SF4.
WARNING
Do not apply power to the SF7x storage enclosure at this time.

5.2.2 Dual-Host Configuration
Use the following procedures for cabling an SF7x storage enclosure in an
existing Sx300 storage array configured for dual-host.
The following procedures assume that all devices installed previous to an
new installation of an SF7x storage enclosure are cabled in the dual-host
configuration.
5.2.2.1 Identifying DSSI Connectors on the System I/O Panel
The following procedure explains how to locate and identify the DSSI
connections on the system I/O panel.
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the systems
that the storage array is connected to.

Note
This procedure assumes that no SF7x storage enclosure are installed
internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage enclosures
installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA modules
installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to those
SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its DSSI
connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array. Do NOT
count this KFMSA module in the following steps.

1. Open the system I/O panels on both systems by removing the screws that
secure the I/O panel to the system chassis. Let the panel swing down to its
rest position.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–29

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

2. Find the first KFMSA module installed in the XMI backplane of each
system. It will be the KFMSA module in the lowest numbered slot of the
XMI backplane.
3. Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.
4. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the left is KFMSA DSSI bus 2 and the DSSI connector on the right is
KFMSA DSSI bus 1. These connectors should be labeled BLUE for bus 1
and RED for bus 2.
5. Find the next KFMSA module installed in the XMI backplane of each
system. It will be the next KFMSA module after the KFMSA module in the
lowest numbered slot of the XMI backplane.
6. Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.
7. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the left is KFMSA DSSI bus 2 and the DSSI connector on the right is
KFMSA DSSI bus 1. These connectors should be labeled YELLOW for bus
1 and GREEN for bus 2.
8. Find the next KFMSA module installed in the XMI backplane of each
system. It will be the next KFMSA module after the KFMSA module in the
previous steps.
9. Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.
10. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the left is KFMSA DSSI bus 2 and the DSSI connector on the right is
KFMSA DSSI bus 1. These connectors should be labeled BLUE/WHITE for
bus 1 and RED/WHITE for bus 2.
If these connectors are not labeled, label them now with the small colored
labels in the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–32882–01).
5.2.2.2 Cabling SF1
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the systems
that the storage array is connected to.

5–30 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

The following steps are for cabling SF1 with a magazine tape subsystem TF1:
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

1. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) from the
bottom DSSI connector of the magazine tape subsystem TF1.
2. Reconnect this 70-inch DSSI cable to the leftmost DSSI connector on the
rear of the SF1. See Figure 5–14.
3. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) in the bottom DSSI
connector of the magazine tape subsystem TF1.
4. Loosen the shipping screw in the rear, upper right corner, of the magazine
tape subsystem TF1.
5. Cabling the magazine tape subsystem makes sure that the correct cable
slack will be provided when the inner assembly is pushed back into the
extrusion tube.
6. Connect the 42-inch DSSI cable from the bottom DSSI connector of the
magazine tape subsystem of the SF1 (see Figure 5–14).
7. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5.2.2.3 Cabling SF2
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.
The SF7x storage enclosure installed as SF2 of the storage array has
two possible cabling configurations. The difference depends on whether

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–31

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–14 Installing the 42-Inch DSSI Cable (Position 1)

DSSI
CONNECTORS

1 0

AC RECEPTACLE

AC POWER
SWITCH

POWER SUPPLY
FAULT INDICATOR
(BEHIND PANEL)

230

115

FAULT

LINE VOLTAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH
(BEHIND PANEL)
SHR-X0127A-90

a magazine tape subsystem is installed (TF2) of the Sx300 storage
array.

The following steps are for cabling SF2 without a magazine tape subsystem
TF2:
1. At the rear of the storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.

5–32 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

2. Swing open the panel.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install two 70-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21R–5L). Secure this cable
to the I/O panel with two Phillips screws .
4. Plug the other end of the 70-inch DSSI cable from port 2 into the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF7x.
5. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
6. Plug the other end of the 70-inch DSSI cable from port 8 into the leftmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF7x. See Figure 5–15.
7. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet.
8. Plug two 108-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21Q–09) into ports 2 and 8
(see Figure 5–15). Tighten the retainer screws with your fingers.
Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its
DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

9. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate ports
on the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine
which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled BLUE and
RED.
b. From port 2 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (RED) of the first system I/O panel.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–33

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–15 Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for Position 2

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

From port 8 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (RED) of the second system I/O panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

The following steps are for cabling SF2 with a magazine tape subsystem TF2:
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

5–34 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

1. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) from the
bottom DSSI connector of the magazine tape subsystem TF2.
2. Reconnect this 70-inch DSSI cable to the leftmost DSSI connector on the
rear of the SF2.
3. Install a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) in the bottom DSSI
connector of the magazine tape subsystem TF2.
4. Cabling the magazine tape subsystem makes sure that the correct cable
slack will be provided when the inner assembly is pushed back into the
extrusion tube.
5. Connect the 42-inch DSSI cable from the bottom DSSI connector of the
magazine tape subsystem TF2 to the rightmost DSSI connector of the SF2..
6. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5.2.2.4 Cabling SF3
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF3 :
1. At the rear of the storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
2. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L). See Figure 5–16.
Secure this cable to the I/O panel with the two Phillips screws removed
from the blank panel. Plug the other end of this cable into the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF7x in SF3.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–35

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

4. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) (see Figure 5–16).
Plug the other end of this cable into the leftmost DSSI connector at the
rear of the SF3.
5. For the cable to port 3, route the DSSI cable on the right side. For the
cable to port 11, route the DSSI cable under the cable retainer on the left
side.
6. Plug two 108-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21Q–09) into ports 3 and
11. Tighten the retainer screws on the 108-inch DSSI cables with your
fingers.
Figure 5–16 Installing the 70-Inch DSSI Cables (Position 3)

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

5–36 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its
DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate ports
on the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine
which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled YELLOW
and GREEN.
b. From port 3 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (YELLOW) of the first system I/O panel.
c.

From port 11 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable
to the right DSSI connector (YELLOW) of the second system I/O panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5.2.2.5 Cabling SF4
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF4:
1. At the rear of the storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
Use a 3/16-inch flatblade screwdriver to loosen the two captive screws at
the right of the panel.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–37

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

2. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L). Plug the other end
of this cable into the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of SF4.
4. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) in place of the panel
blank you just removed in the previous step. Plug the other end of this
cable into the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF4.
5. For the cable to port 4, route the DSSI cable on the right side. For the
cable to port 8, route the DSSI cable under the cable retainer on the left
side.
6. Plug two 108-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21Q–09) into ports 4 and 8.
Tighten the retainer screws on the 108-inch DSSI cables with your fingers.
Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. Do NOT use this KFMSA module or its
DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate ports
on the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine
which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled YELLOW
and GREEN.
b. From port 4 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (GREEN) of the first system I/O panel.
c.

From port 10 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable
to the right DSSI connector (GREEN) of the second system I/O panel.

5–38 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

CAUTION
Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5.2.2.6 Cabling SF5
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF5:
1. At the rear of the storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
Use a 3/16-inch flatblade screwdriver to loosen the two captive screws at
the right of the panel.
2. Swing open and remove the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L). See Figure 5–17.
Plug the other end of this cable into the rightmost DSSI connector at the
rear of the SF5.
4. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) (see Figure 5–17) in
place of the panel blank you just removed in the previous step. Plug the
other end of this cable into the leftmost DSSI connector at the rear of the
SF5.
5. For the cable to port 5, route the DSSI cable on the right side. For the
cable to port 11, route the DSSI cable under the cable retainer on the left
side.
6. Plug two 108-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21Q–09) into ports 5 and
11. Tighten the retainer screws on the 108-inch DSSI cables with your
fingers.

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–39

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Figure 5–17 Installing the 70- and 108-Inch DSSI Cables for Position 5

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

5–40 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate ports
on the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine
which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled
BLUE/WHITE and RED/WHITE.
b. From port 5 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (BLUE/WHITE) of the first system I/O panel.
c.

From port 11 on the Sx300 I/O panel connect, the 108-inch DSSI cable
to the right DSSI connector (BLUE/WHITE) of the second system I/O
panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5.2.2.7 Cabling SF6
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling SF6:
1. At the rear of the storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
Use a 3/16-inch flatblade screwdriver to loosen the two captive screws at
the right of the panel.
2. Swing open and remove the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L). Plug the other end
of this cable into the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF7x in
position 6.
4. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) in place of the panel
blank you just removed in the previous step.
Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–41

5.2 Cabling the SF7x in Storage Array Position

Plug the other end of this cable into the leftmost DSSI connector at the
rear of the SF7x in SF6.
5. For the cable to port 6, route the DSSI cable on the right side. For the
cable to port 12, route the DSSI cable under the cable retainer on the left
side.
6. Plug two 108-inch DSSI cables (part number BC21Q–09) into ports 6 and
12. Tighten the retainer screws on the 108-inch DSSI cables with your
fingers.
Note
The following step assumes that no SF7x storage enclosures are
installed internally in the system cabinet. If there are SF7x storage
enclosures installed in the system cabinet, then one of the KFMSA
modules installed in the system XMI backplane must be connected to
those SF7x storage enclosures. DO NOT USE this KFMSA module or
its DSSI connections to connect the system to the Sx300 storage array.

7. Plug the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables into the appropriate ports
on the system I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine
which of the two DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Locate the DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel labeled
BLUE/WHITE and RED/WHITE.
b. From port 6 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the right DSSI connector (RED/WHITE) of the first system I/O panel.
c.

From port 12 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable
to the right DSSI connector (RED/WHITE) of the second system I/O
panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the SF7x enclosure at this time.

5–42 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.3 Powering Up the SF7x

5.3 Powering Up the SF7x
Follow these steps to apply power to a newly installed SF7x storage enclosure:
CAUTION
Make sure that the drive dc power switches on the front of the
enclosure are in the out position.

1. Turn the ac power switch on the rear of the enclosure on. If the green
power supply fault light emitting diode (LED) is lit, see Chapter 8.
2. Press each of the four (4) drive dc power switches on the front of the SF7x
enclosure, one at a time. If the green LED on the drive dc power switch
does not light, see Chapter 8.
3. Observe the OCP indicators for each drive. If the Ready indicator is lit and
no other LED comes on and stays on, the drive has passed the power-on
self-test (POST). Should the Ready indicator not come on and the red Fault
indicator come on, see Chapter 8.
4. Press each of the four (4) Ready buttons, one at a time. The Ready
indicator should be on and stay on, with the Fault indicator remaining off.
If a fault occurs, refer to Chapter 8.
Once these steps are done and the drive has passed POST, then — and only
then — should you proceed to the next section.

5.3.1 Updating the System Configuration Sheet
Now that the enclosure has been successfully installed, power has been
applied, and the drives have passed POST, you are ready to update the system
configuration sheet to add the new ISEs.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for complete details on how to fill out a system configuration sheet.

5.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and OCP
For a single-host configuration, use the following colored labels on the SF7x
OCP door, magazine tape subsystem front panel, and all DSSI cables:

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–43

5.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and OCP

Label Colors

Connections

Blue

Port 1, SF1, SF3, TF1

Red

Port 2, SF2, SF3, TF2

Yellow

Port 3, SF4, SF6, TF3

green

Port 4,SF5, SF6, TF4

For a dual-host configuration, use the following colored labels on the SF7x OCP
door, magazine tape subsystem front panel, and all DSSI cables:
Label Colors

Connections

Blue

Port 1, SF1, TF1, port 7

Red

Port 2, SF2, TF2, port 8

Yellow

Port 3, SF3, TF3, port 9

Green

Port 4, SF4, TF4, port 10

Blue with white strip

Port 5, SF5, port 11

Red with white strip

Port 6, SF6, port 12

5.4.1 Filling Out the Labels
Follow the steps on the inside of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number
36-32882-01) to fill out the labels for the DSSI cables and SF7x operator control
panels.
Proceed once you have filled the cable and OCP labels.

5.4.2 Labeling the Cables
For each cable you just installed, place a label 2 inches behind the connector as
shown in Figure 5–18.

5.4.3 Labeling the OCP
For each OCP on each SF7x you installed, place a label as shown in
Figure 5–19.

5–44 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

5.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and OCP

Figure 5–18 Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable

LABEL

SHR-X0108-90

Figure 5–19 Placing a Label on the OCP Door

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

NNnNN
SHR_X1128C_89

Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array 5–45

5.5 Final Verification

5.5 Final Verification
Now that all the hardware installation, cabling and labeling, and the powering
up steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and
verify the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the host system.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
and the TF857 Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual (EK–TF857–SM) for
detailed information and how to proceed with verifying the correct operation of
each ISE that has been installed. In these manuals, you will find the procedure
for establishing the communications between the ISEs, the adapter module,
and the system. You will also find the step-by-step procedures for reconfiguring
the system with its newly installed DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.
Remember, each SF7x enclosure can contain two or four disk ISEs. Each
magazine tape subsystem contains one tape ISE. A fully configured storage
array contains 24 disk ISEs and 2 tape ISEs.
If at any time you detect a failure, see Chapter 8.
Once the verification is complete, close the cabinet doors; turn the hex-Allen
fasteners one quarter turn clockwise to lock. The system is ready to be turned
over to the system manager.

5–46 Installing the SF7x Storage Enclosure in an Sx300 Storage Array

6
Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in
an Sx300 Storage Array
This chapter describes the steps to install the magazine tape subsystem in an
Sx300 storage array:
•

Steps to install (Section 6.1)

•

Cabling the subsystem (Section 6.2)
Single-host configuration (Section 6.2.1)
Dual-host configuration (Section 6.2.2)

•

Powering up the subsystem (Section 6.3)

•

Labeling the subsystem (Section 6.4)

•

Final verification (Section 6.5)

As many as two magazine tape subsystems can be installed in the Sx300
storage array.
Only Digital Multivendor Customer Services and other installing personnel
that have been trained in ESD procedures can use the procedures in this
chapter.
Follow all the steps in this chapter to install a magazine tape subsystem in an
Sx300 storage array.
Table 6–1 lists the tools required to install the magazine tape subsystem into
the storage array.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–1

Table 6–1 Magazine Tape Subsystem Required Tool List
Description

Part Number

#0 Phillips screwdriver

29–10991–00

#1 Phillips screwdriver

29–11001–00

#2 Phillips screwdriver

29–11005–00

1/8-inch slot screwdriver

29–10802–00

5/16-inch slot screwdriver

29–10960–00

1/8-inch hex key

29–26115–00

3/16-inch hex key

29–26118–00

11/32-inch nutdriver

29–10674–00

See Chapter 8 for tools or equipment recommended for use when
troubleshooting after a successful installation.

6.1 Steps to Install
The magazine tape subsystem that you are installing contains a tape
integrated storage element (ISE) and the tape cartridge loader assemblies.
This section contains several major parts. The first part explains the steps
necessary to do the following:
•

Unpack, inspect for damage, and identify parts

•

Determine where to install the magazine tape subsystem

•

Read and fill out the system configuration sheet

The next part explains the steps to install the magazine tape subsystem itself:
•

Prepare the array cabinet to receive a magazine tape subsystem

•

Install the supporting hardware and magazine tape subsystem, and set the
DSSI ID switches

•

Cable the magazine tape subsystem to comply with the DSSI bus cabling
conventions

The last part explains the steps to do the following:
•

Power up the magazine tape subsystem, run the power-on self-test, and
run the configuration programs

•

Label all cables and operator control panels

6–2 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

•

Verify the operation of the enclosure after a successful installation

Follow all the steps in each of these parts in the order they are presented and
do not skip any steps.
Remember that the magazine tape subsystem installs in positions 5 and 6 and
4 and 3 only.
The first step is to unpack the shipping container. See Section 6.1.1.

6.1.1 Unpacking the Magazine Tape Subsystem
The subsystem is shipped in an environmental barrier bag with desiccant, the
container, and all packing materials.
Note
After unpacking, retain the container and all packing materials.

At this time, examine the subsystem for physical damage. If you find
any damage, do not attempt to install the subsystem. Notify your office
immediately.
If there is no damage, then unpack all the boxes and bags, and identify all the
parts by using Table 6–2.
Table 6–2 Magazine Tape Subsystem Kit Contents
Description

Quantity

Part Number

Magazine tape subsystem

Subsystem specific

Hardware mounting assembly

Subsystem specific

Slide mount assembly

–1

Weldment bracket (front top)

70–26052–01

Weldment bracket (front bottom)

70–26052–02

Shoulder screw, 10-32. 0.500

12–24007–01

Shoulder screw, 10-32, 0.438

12–24007–02

Lock washer, internal steel

90–06637–00

DSSI cable retainer

74–41302–01

1 The slide mount assembly comes assembled and does not have a single part number.

(continued on next page)

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–3

6.1 Steps to Install

Table 6–2 (Cont.) Magazine Tape Subsystem Kit Contents
Description

Quantity

Part Number

Chassis retainer

74–35858–01

10-32 Phillips (SEMS)

12–21368–03

Machine screw, Phillips, 0.500

90–06073–02

Machine screw, Phillips, 1.5

90–06079–03

Lock washer, external steel

90–07651–00

AC power cord, 8-foot

17–00442–03

DSSI cables, 42-inch, box-to-box

BC21Q–3F

Owner’s manual

EK–SF72S–OM

Installation guide

EK–Sx300–IG

Subsystem owner’s manual

Subsystem specific

Label booklet

36–32882–01

Note
DSSI cable retainer and weldment bracket of this kit are not used for
the Sx300 cabinet.

6.1.2 Where to Install the Magazine Tape Subsystem
The second & third level of the Sx300 storage array cabinet is used for
magazine tape subsystems. The subsystems install in numerical order. Facing
the front of the cabinet, note that position 4 is on the left and position 3 is on
the right.

6.1.3 Completing the System Configuration Sheet
Locate the system configuration sheet. If you cannot locate this sheet or if the
one that is available is either not filled out or filled out incorrectly, fill one out
immediately.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for an explanation of this sheet and how to fill it out.

6–4 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–1 System Configuration Sheet (Single-Host)

KFMSA/Single−System Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Color Code

Color Code
config_shr−x0109.rags

Figure 6–1 and 6–2 show examples of the system configuration sheet.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–5

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–2 System Configuration Sheet (Dual-Host)

KFMSA/DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code

Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code
config_shr−x0133.rags

6–6 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–3 System Configuration Sheet (Three-Host)

KFMSA/DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet
[for VAX 6000 and 9000 systems]
KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Bus
DSSI ID #
KFMSA XMI Node #

Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code

Bus
DSSI ID #

Color Code
config_shr−x0133b.rags

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–7

6.1 Steps to Install

6.1.4 Installation Procedure
This section describes the step-by-step procedures for installing a magazine
tape subsystem in an Sx300 storage array.
Be sure to:
•

Follow each step in order, and do not skip any steps

•

Leave sufficient room to perform the installation (approximately 1.5 meters
to 1.8 meters [5 feet to 6 feet] front and rear of the array)
WARNING
Observe all ESD precautions and procedures.
An antistatic wrist strap is inside the front and rear doors.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to pick up or support the product by the rear of the
enclosure. Doing so will injure the person attempting the installation
or damage the power supply.
To maintain stability, extend only one SF72 storage enclosure or
magazine tape subsystem on the slide mounts at a time.

6.1.4.1 Preparing the Sx300 Storage Array
The following procedure describes how to prepare the array to receive the
magazine tape subsystem:
1. Place the magazine tape subsystem to be installed to one side, in front of
the cabinet.
2. Open front and rear doors of the Sx300 storage array.
3. Remove the front bezel panel that corresponds to the position of the Sx300
storage array you are installing.

6–8 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

6.1.4.2 Hardware Installation Procedures
Perform the following steps in full and in the order presented.
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Install the ac power cord:
a. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

b. Connect the male end of the ac power cord to the first available outlet
on the power controller.
2. Install the slide mount and associated hardware. Refer to Figure 3–9 and
Chapter 3.
The slide mount has two parts. One part is called the ‘‘adjustable’’ end and
the other is called the ‘‘slotted’’ end. The adjustable end has four screws
that, when loosened, allow the slide mount to be placed in the cabinet and
then extended to make a secure fit.
3. Install the magazine tape subsystem.
a. Loosen the screw in the rear, right corner, of the magazine tape
subsystem.
b. Install both chassis retainers on the front, right side (position 5) or left
side (position 6) of the extrusion tube (top and bottom, Figure 6–4).
c.

At the front of the cabinet, lift the extrusion tube up and onto the slide
mount until the chassis retainers touch the weldment brackets.

d. Install and tighten the two outer weldment screws, then install and
tighten the two inner weldment screws. See Figure 6–5.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–9

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–4 Chassis Retainers

SEMS SCREWS (4)
12-21368-03

CHASSIS
RETAINERS

SHR_X1123B_89

Tighten the upper and lower weldment 1/2-inch shoulder screws and
washers.

4. While the inner assembly is out of the extrusion tube, check the DSSI
ID switches on the DSSI controller module. Make sure that the DSSI
ID switch is set to 0 and that the Tape Mass Storage Control Protocol
(TMSCP) switch is down or enabled. Refer to the magazine tape subsystem
documentation for information on how to access the DSSI controller
module.
5. Perform the following steps to complete the hardware installation of the
magazine tape subsystem:
a. Lift and push the inner assembly back into the extrusion tube.

6–10 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–5 Securing the Tube to the Weldment Brackets

CHASSIS RETAINER (2)
74-35858-01

1/2-INCH PHILLIPS
SCREW (2)
90-06079-02

LOCK WASHER (2)
90-07651-03
SLIDE MOUNT

1 1/2-INCH PHILLIPS
SCREW (2)
90-06079-03

HARDWARE
HERE IS
SAME AS
LISTED
ABOVE

SHR-X0132A-90

b. At the rear of the magazine tape subsystem, make sure that the ac
power switch is off or in the 0 position. See Figure 6–6.
c.

Also check the factory set ac power on the magazine tape subsystem.
Model variants –AA are 120 Vac and model variants –AB are 220 Vac.

d. Place the subsystem in the head cleaning position (first mechanical
stop).
e.

Mount the half bezel bracket to the tape system.

At this time, connect the ac power cord to the subsystem.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–11

6.1 Steps to Install

g. Check that this and all other operator control panel (OCP) and
magazine tape subsystem fronts project through the front storage
array correctly. If not, adjust the height with shims. Place the half
bezel and the side strips in position.
CAUTION
Do not power up the enclosure at this time.

6–12 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.1 Steps to Install

Figure 6–6 AC Power Switch, Voltage Selections, and Power Cord

DSSI
CONNECTORS

AC POWER
SWITCH

AC RECEPTACLE
SHR-X0141B-90-CPG

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position
This section describes the step-by-step procedure to cable the magazine tape
subsystem that you just installed to the existing DSSI bus configuration of the
Sx300 storage array.
See Section 6.2.1 for instructions on how to cable the magazine tape subsystem
in an Sx300 storage array configured for single-host. See Section 6.2.2 for
instructions on how to cable the magazine tape subsystem in an Sx300 storage
array configured for dual-host.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–13

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

6.2.1 Single-Host Configuration
Use the following procedures for cabling a magazine tape subsystem in an
existing Sx300 storage array configured for single-host.
6.2.1.1 Cabling TF1
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
which the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

The following steps are for cabling a magazine tape subsystem in an existing
Sx300 storage array configured for single-host:
1. Take the disk ISEs SF1 off-line before you proceed. To do so, first take
each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the drive
dc power switches to the out position. Lastly, turn off the ac power at the
rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF1.
3. Connect the 70-inch DSSI cable removed from SF1 (Figure 6–7) and
connect it to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the magazine tape
subsystem. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
4. Connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF2 and to the bottom DSSI connector
at the rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF1. Route this DSSI cable on
the right side of the cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not power up the magazine tape subsystem or the SF72 storage
enclosure at this time.

6–14 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

Figure 6–7 Installing the 42- and 70-Inch DSSI Cable (TF1)

DSSI
CONNECTORS

AC POWER
SWITCH

AC RECEPTACLE
SHR-X0141B-90-CPG

6.2.1.2 Cabling TF2
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Take the drives SF2 (if present) off-line before you proceed. To do so, first
take each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–15

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

drive dc power switches to the out position. Lastly, turn off the ac power at
the rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF2.
3. Install this 70-inch DSSI cable to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the
magazine tape subsystem.
4. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
5. At this time, connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the
rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF2 and to the bottom DSSI
connector at the rear of the magazine tape subsystem in TF2.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the appropriate side of the cabinet.
7. If no SF72 storage enclosure is installed SF2, then at the rear of the Sx300
storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
8. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
9. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L).
10. Connect the other end of this cable into the top DSSI connector at the rear
of the magazine tape subsystem. See Figure 6–8.
11. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet.
12. Connect a 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) into the port you
just installed in the previous steps. Tighten the retainer screws with your
fingers.
13. Plug the other end of this cable into the appropriate port on the system
I/O panel at the rear of the system cabinet. To determine which of the two
DSSI connectors on the system I/O panel to connect to:
a. Open the system I/O panel by removing the six screws that secure the
I/O panel to the system chassis. Let the panel swing down to its rest
position.

6–16 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

Figure 6–8 Installing the DSSI Cables

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

b. Find the first KFMSA module installed in the system XMI backplane.
It will be the KFMSA module in the lowest numbered slot of the
KFMSA modules installed.
c.

Follow the cabling from the backplane to the system I/O panel.

d. While viewing the front of the I/O panel, note that the DSSI connector
on the right is KFMSA DSSI bus 1 and the left is bus 2.
e.

For port 2 on the Sx300 I/O panel, connect the 108-inch DSSI cable to
the left DSSI connector of the system I/O panel.
CAUTION

Do not apply power to the subsystem at this time.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–17

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

14. Install a DSSI terminator in the bottom DSSI connector at the rear of the
subsystem.
6.2.1.3 Cabling TF3
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Take the drives SF4 (if present) off-line before you proceed. To do so, first
take each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the
drive dc power switches to the out position. Last, turn off the ac power at
the rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF4.
3. Install this 70-inch DSSI cable to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the
magazine tape subsystem.
4. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
5. At this time, connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the
rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF4 and to the bottom DSSI
connector at the rear of the magazine tape subsystem in TF3.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the appropriate side of the cabinet.
7. If no SF72 storage enclosure is installed (SF4), then at the rear of the
Sx300 storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the bottom.
8. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
9. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L).
10. Connect the other end of this cable into the top DSSI connector at the rear
of the magazine tape subsystem. Refer to Figure 6–8.
11. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet.

6–18 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

12. Connect a 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) into the port you
just installed in the previous steps. Tighten the retainer screws with your
fingers.
13. Plug the other end of this cable into the appropriate port on the system I/O
panel at the rear of the system cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the subsystem at this time.

14. Install a DSSI terminator in the bottom DSSI connector at the rear of the
subsystem.
6.2.1.4 Cabling TF4
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

1. At the rear of the Sx300 storage array, locate the DSSI I/O panel at the
bottom.
2. Swing open the panel from the cabinet frame.
3. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L).
4. Connect the other end of this cable into the top DSSI connector at the rear
of the magazine tape subsystem. Refer to Figure 6–8.
5. Route this DSSI cable on the left side of the cabinet.
6. Connect a 108-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–09) into the port you
just installed in the previous steps. Tighten the retainer screws with your
fingers.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–19

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

7. Plug the other end of this cable into the appropriate port on the system I/O
panel at the rear of the system cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the subsystem at this time.

8. Install a DSSI terminator in the bottom DSSI connector at the rear of the
subsystem.

6.2.2 Dual-Host Configuration
Use the following procedures for cabling a magazine tape subsystem in an
existing Sx300 storage array configured for dual-host.
6.2.2.1 Cabling TF1
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Take the disk ISEs in position 1 off-line before you proceed. To do so, first
take each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the
drive dc power switches to the out position. Last, turn off the ac power at
the rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF72 enclosure in position
1.
3. Connect the 70-inch DSSI cable removed from the SF72 storage enclosure
to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem.
4. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.

6–20 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

5. Connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF72 in position 1 to the bottom DSSI
connector at the rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF1.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
6.2.2.2 Cabling TF2
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Take the disk ISEs SF2 off-line before you proceed. To do so, first take
each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the drive
dc power switches to the out position. Last, turn off the ac power at the
rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF72 enclosure (SF2).
3. Connect the 70-inch DSSI cable removed from the SF72 storage enclosure
to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem.
4. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
5. Connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF3 to the bottom DSSI connector at the
rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF2.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–21

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

6.2.2.3 Cabling TF3
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

1. Take the disk ISEs (SF3) off-line before you proceed. To do so, first take
each ISE off-line by pressing the Ready buttons. Then press all the drive
dc power switches to the out position. Last, turn off the ac power at the
rear of the storage enclosure.
CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

2. Disconnect the 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) connected to
the rightmost DSSI connector at the rear of the SF3.
3. Connect the 70-inch DSSI cable removed from the SF72 storage enclosure
to the top DSSI connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem.
4. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
5. Connect a 42-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21Q–3F) to the rightmost
DSSI connector at the rear of the SF3 to the bottom DSSI connector at the
rear of the magazine tape subsystem TF3.
6. Route this DSSI cable on the right side of the cabinet.
6.2.2.4 Cabling TF4
WARNING
Before performing the following steps, refer to the system documentation for the correct steps to perform an orderly shutdown of the system
that the Sx300 storage array is connected to.

CAUTION
Use care not to disturb or damage power cords and DSSI cables that
are already connected to the DSSI I/O panel.

6–22 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.2 Cabling the Subsystem in Sx300 Storage Array Position

1. Swing open the I/O panel from the cabinet frame.
2. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) to port 4 on the
Sx300 storage array I/O panel.
3. Connect the other end of this 70-inch DSSI cable to the top DSSI connector
on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem.
4. Install a 70-inch DSSI cable (part number BC21R–5L) to port 10 on the
Sx300 storage array I/O panel.
5. Connect the other end of this 70-inch DSSI cable to the bottom DSSI
connector on the rear of the magazine tape subsystem.

6.3 Powering Up the Magazine Tape Subsystem
Follow these steps to apply power to a newly installed magazine tape
subsystem.
1. Turn the ac power switch on the rear of the subsystem to the on or 1
position.
a. All its OCP indicators turn on (generally within 15 seconds).
b. While the elevator scans the magazine, all OCP indicators, except for
Power On, turn off.
c.

Assuming the subsystem has a magazine with a cartridge in position
0, and no cartridge is in the drive, the final power-on self-test (POST)
status displays:
Power On indicator on
Eject indicator on
Load/Unload indicator on
Slot Select indicator on
Slot 0 indicator on

2. If a fault occurs, see Chapter 8 or the Magazine Tape Subsystem service
manual.
Proceed to Section 6.3.1 once these steps are accomplished and the subsystem
has passed POST.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–23

6.3 Powering Up the Magazine Tape Subsystem

6.3.1 Updating the System Configuration Sheet
Now that the subsystem has been successfully installed, power has been
applied, and the drives have passed POST, you are ready to update the system
configuration sheet.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for complete details on how to fill out a system configuration sheet.

6.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and Magazine Tape Subsystem
For a single-host configuration, use the following colored labels on the SF72
OCP door, magazine tape subsystem front panel, and all DSSI cables.
Label Colors

Connections

Blue

Port 1, TF1

Red

Port 2, TF2

Yellow

Port 3, TF3

Green

Port 4, TF4

For a dual-host configuration, use the following colored labels on the SF72 OCP
door, magazine tape subsystem front panel, and all DSSI cables.
Label Colors

Connections

Blue

Port 1, TF1, port 7

Red

Port 2, TF2, port 8

Yellow

Port 3, TF3, port 9

Green

Port 4, TF4, port 10

6.4.1 Filling Out the Labels
Follow the steps on the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part
number 36–32882–01) to fill out the labels for the DSSI cables and SF72
operator control panels.
Proceed once you have filled the cable and OCP labels.

6–24 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and Magazine Tape Subsystem

6.4.2 Labeling the Cables
For each cable you just installed, place a label 2 inches behind the connector as
shown in Figure 6–9.

Figure 6–9 Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable

LABEL

SHR-X0108-90

6.4.3 Labeling the Magazine Tape Subsystem
Place the labels for the front panel of the magazine tape subsystem as shown
in Figure 6–10.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–25

6.4 Labeling the DSSI Cables and Magazine Tape Subsystem

Figure 6–10 Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem

O PE R A TO R C O N TR O L PA N E L

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

Power On

DSSI
NODE
ID LABEL

Write
Protected
Tape In Use
Use
Cleaning Tape
Magazine
Fault
Loader Fault

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

0
Power On
Write
Protected

Write Protect
Load Fault

Tape In Use
Head Clean
Indicator
Drive Fault
Loader Fault

40% REDUCTION

SHR_X1025C_89

6–26 Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array

6.5 Final Verification

6.5 Final Verification
Now that all the hardware installation, cabling and labeling, and the powering
up steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and
verify the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the host system.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–
IM) for detailed information and how to proceed with verifying the correct
operation of each ISE which has been installed. In these manuals, you will
find the procedure for establishing the communications between the ISEs, the
adapter module, and the system. You will also find the step-by-step procedures
for reconfiguring the system with its newly installed DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.
Remember, each SF72 enclosure can contain two or four disk ISEs. Each
magazine tape subsystem contains one tape ISE. A fully configured
Sx300 storage array contains 24 disk ISEs or max. 4 tape ISEs in mixed
configurations.
If at any time you detect a failure, see Chapter 8.
Once the verification is complete mount the front bezel. The system is ready to
be turned over to the system manager.

Installing the Magazine Tape Subsystem in an Sx300 Storage Array 6–27

7
Installation and Preparation of the Add-On
SDI Storage Elements
This chapter describes the procedures for installing an add-on disk drive, for
example RA9x/SA7x in a DECArray300 cabinet. Procedures for using the
Digital lifting device and removing and replacing the cabinet front bezels,
operator control panels (OCPs), cabinet rear panel, cabinet top cover, and
cabinet kick plate are described. Finally, internal Standard Disk Interface
(SDI) cable and power cable routing and connections are included.

7.1 Site Preparation and Planning
Site preparation and planning are necessary before installing an DECArray300
cabinet system or add-on disk drive. The focus of this chapter is the
installation of additional SDI disk drives in an existing DECArray300
cabinet system; therefore, much of the site preparation and planning should be
complete. Please refer to Section 1.5 for Site Preparation. However, it will be
necessary to plan for the added weight and power requirements of additional
disk drives. It is recommended that ac power wiring for the computer system
be checked to determine adequate capacity for expansion. The wiring used by
Digital in this product conforms to Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) standards.
To prevent damage to equipment and personnel, make sure power sources meet
the specifications required for this equipment. For product specifications, refer
to Chapter 1.
The DECArray300 cabinet system will arrive at the site ready for installation.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this equipment. Installation and
service must be performed by trained Digital Multivendor Customer
Services personnel. Bodily injury or equipment damage may result
from incorrect servicing.

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–1

7.1 Site Preparation and Planning

7.2 SA300/H9643 Cabinet System Installation
Refer to Chapter 2 for cabinet unpacking and de-skidding procedures.
To install the DECArray300 cabinet system, use the following procedure:
1. After following the thermal stabilization procedure described in Chapter 1,
move the cabinet into position within the computer room.
CAUTION
It is important to adhere to the thermal stabilization procedure
described in Chapter 1. Failure to do so may result in damage to the
equipment.

2. Before applying power to the system, make sure the storage element
voltage selector switches have been set correctly for the site’s voltage
requirements. See Section 7.3.5.
3. Remove the cabinet rear access panel using the procedure described in
Section 3.8.
4. The internal SDI cables for the already installed Storage Enclosures have
already been connected to the cabinet I/O bulkhead panel at the factory.
The disk drive power cords have also been connected to the rear panel and
the power controller (Section 7.3.4). The Additional SDI cables for ADD-on
Storage enclosures are shipped with the add-on Kits. For the 220/240 Vac
version the additional power cords required for add-on storage enclosures
are part of the installation kits.
5. Connect the external SDI cables from the cabinet I/O bulkhead panel to
the host system I/O panel. Connect Port A/B of RA90/92 disk drives to
connector LF (see Figure 7–2).
6. Plug the power controller power cable into the proper wall outlet.
7. Set the power controller BUS/OFF/ON bus switch (marked on the power
controller front panel) to the proper position. Refer to Chapter 3.
8. Turn on the power controller circuit breaker. Perform the power-up and
acceptance testing procedures in Chapter 3 to complete the installation.

7–2 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

7.2 SA300/H9643 Cabinet System Installation

Table 7–1 Add-on Kit content- CK-SA300-LX
NBR Part_number

Description

17–01699–01

CABLE ASSY, TRIAX 93 OHM 16 COND M

–

90–09984–00

SCREW, SEMS 6–32 PAN .375 XRCS

17–01482–01

CABLE ASSY, TRIAX 93OHM 04 COND F–

—

17–00442–19

PWR CORD, TERM 9’ LG 15A

70–25686–02

RAIL CHASSIS ASSEMBLY

70–25687–02

BRACKET, RAIL ASSEMBLY

74–36464–01

BAR, INSERT NUT

90–00039–26

SCREW, MACH 10–32 FLT .500 XRCS

90–06637–00

WASHER, LOCK INTERNAL STEEL

12–24007–02

SCREW, SHLD 10–32 CAP .438 SOCK

90–06078–01

SCREW, MACH 10–32 PAN XRCS

—

90–06664–00

WASHER, FLAT SST

—

90–07906–00

WASHER, HELICAL SPLIT STEEL

—

74–36160–01

BLOCK, WEDGE

—

74–35860–03

BRACKET, CHASSIS RETAINER, REAR

—

90–10201–01

CLIP, "U" SPEED

—

74–39075–02

BLOCK, REAR LOCKING

—

90–00063–39

SCREW, THRL 10– TRS .500 XRCS

—

74–37241–02

BRACKET, CHASSIS,STABILIZER

—

90–10893–01

SCREW, MACH 1/4– HEX .625 SOCK

—

90–00039–27

SCREW, MACH 10–32 FLT .437 XRCS

—

36–16923–40

LABEL, PORT IDENT "A"

36–16923–41

LABEL, PORT IDENT "B"

90–10266–00

TIE, CABLE 7.312L

99–06557–30

BAG, POLY RECLOSE 2 MIL THK clar

99–08213–01

LAMINATE

99–08980–01

SHEET, CORR, DC, 275, C, NG

EK–OSA7X–UG

SA7X USER GUIDE

—

EK–ORA90–UG

RA90/RA92 DISK DRIVE USER GUIDE

—

•

VARIATION L1 IS THE MOUNTING KIT FOR SA7X IN THE SX3XX 42"
CABINET.

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–3

7.2 SA300/H9643 Cabinet System Installation

•

VARIATION L2 IS THE MOUNTING KIT FOR RA9X IN THE SX3XX 42"
CABINET.

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation
The disk drive mounting guide rails have been installed at the factory for
each storage enclosure mounted in the original cabinet configuration. The disk
drive mounting hardware will be located in two places: in the add-on shipping
container and attached to the front of the cabinet frame. Before proceeding
with the add-on installation, make sure all add-on disk drive and cabinet
hardware is available. See Section 7.3.1.

7.3.1 Hardware Check list
Following is a complete list of hardware needed to install and secure the disk
drive in the cabinet. Refer to 7–1:
1. RA90–NA/RA92–NA hardware:
•

Chassis retainer brackets (2), for attaching the RA90/RA92 disk drive
to the cabinet frame.

•

Short 10-32 x 3/8 pan-head Phillips sems screws (4), two screws for
each chassis retainer bracket (for holes on the side of the RA90/RA92
disk drive).

•

Short 10-32 x 7/16 flat-head Phillips screws (2), for attaching the
chassis stabilizer bracket to the top of the RA90/RA92 disk drive.
CAUTION

It is important to use the correct screws here, to avoid damage to disk
drive modules.

2. DECArray300 cabinet hardware:
•

Long 10-32 x 5/8 pan-head Phillips sems screws (2), one for each
retainer bracket (for drive-to-frame connection, located on the cabinet
frame).

•

Chassis stabilizer bracket (1), one per drive for disk drive positions 1,
2, 5, and 6. This bracket will be attached to the cabinet frame with two
10-32 x 5/8 hex serrated screws.

7–4 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

•

Nylon washers will be located in the bottom hole of the grille (bezel)
mounting bracket hardware stack-up for disk drive positions without
disk drives. The nylon washer resides between the grille mounting
bracket and the cabinet frame. These nylon washers will be discarded
when the chassis retainer brackets are installed.

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–5

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

Figure 7–1 Installing Disk Drive/Cabinet Hardware, Front View

CHASSIS
STABILIZER
BRACKET

BEZEL
MOUNTING
BRACKET
10-32 X 5/8
PAN-HEAD
PHILLIPS
SCREWS

10-32 X 7/16
FLATHEAD
PHILLIPS
SCREW

10-32 X 5/8
SERRATED
HEX-HEAD
SCREW

DRIVE
FRONT
NYLON
WASHER

10-32 X 3/8
PAN-HEAD
SCREW
BEZEL
CHASSIS
RETAINER
BRACKET

WASHER
CXO-2727A

7–6 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

7.3.2 Add-On Disk Drive Installation
Unpack the add-on disk drive and complete the thermal stabilization per
the procedures in Chapter 1. Make sure all add-on disk drive and cabinet
hardware is available before beginning installation procedures. Refer to
Section 7.3.1.
The following sections describe the add-on disk drive installation tasks.
Note
For the add-on storage element or sequence for the DECArray300
cabinet, refer to Chapter 3.
1. Upper Level Disk Drive Installation
Only valid for RA9x Drives : When installing an add-on disk drive in the
left-hand, disk drive position 5 of the cabinet, it is necessary to remove the
cabinet top cover. The drive chassis stabilizer bracket cannot be removed
from the frame and attached to the upper level disk drives without first
removing the cabinet top cover refer to Section 3.7.
Each upper level disk drive is supported by two chassis retainer brackets
(top and bottom), and two (top and bottom) factory-installed rear lockdown brackets with one U-clip each (only RA9x). Detailed instructions for
removing / installing this hardware are found in Section 3.12 and 3.17.
The RA9x disk drives will be supported by two chassis stabilizer brackets.
Note
An DECArray300 cabinet system with only one disk drive in disk drive
position 5 or 1 will have a 25-pound stabilizer plate (weight) attached
to the underside of the upper cabinet H-stiffener.
2. Center Level Disk Drive Installation
When installing an add-on disk drive in the center level of the cabinet
(disk drive position 3 or 4), each disk drive is supported by two chassis
retainer brackets (top and bottom), and two factory-installed rear lockdown brackets (top and bottom) with one U-clip each (only RA9x). Detailed
instructions for removing / installing this hardware are described in Section
3.12 and 3.17.
Chassis stabilizer brackets are not used for center level disk drive support
in this cabinet.

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–7

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

3. Lower Level Disk Drive Installation
Before installing an add-on disk drive in the lower level of the cabinet
(disk drive position 1 or 2), it will be necessary to remove the cabinet
kick plate refer to (Section 3.9). Each lower level disk drive is supported
by two chassis retainer brackets (top and bottom), one chassis stabilizer
bracket (only RA9x), and two (top and bottom) factory-installed rear lockdown brackets with one U-clip each (only RA9x). Detailed instructions for
removing / installing this hardware are in Section 3.12 and 3.17.

7.3.3 Electrostatic Discharge
The electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap for the DECArray300
cabinet system is attached to the rear bustle inside the rear panel of the
cabinet.
WARNING
Do not attempt the following procedures unless you have taken proper
precautions against ESD. Wear an ESD grounding strap with the clip
end securely connected to a known grounding point while removing the
disk drive OCP or other ESD-sensitive components.

Note
For removing, replacing and installing all DECArray300 cabinet
hardware, refer to Chapter 3.

7.3.4 SDI Cable and Power Cord Routing and Connections
The internal SDI cables and disk drive power cords have been factory-installed
and routed for all mounted Storage enclosures . The SDI cables have been
connected to the cabinet I/O bulkhead panel. The power cords have been
connected to the rear panel of the power controller.

7–8 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

Figure 7–2 DSSI and SDI I/O Panel

Port A Third
Port B
Port A Second
Port B
Port A First
Port B
LF

PA−LF

PA−LR PA−RR

PA−RF

PB−LF PB−LR

SDI Port
PB−RR PB−RF
P11 P12

DSSI Port

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10

Use the following procedure to connect the internal SDI cables and power cords
at the rear of the cabinet:
1. Go to the rear of the cabinet. The disk drive connections for both internal
SDI cables and power cords are coiled and tie-wrapped at the factory for
the already installed storage enclosures. Carefully cut the cable tie, then

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–9

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

connect the SDI cable connectors to the Port A and Port B connections on
the rear of the disk drive. The power cords for the 110/120 VAC versions of
the cabinet are the only once installed for all 6 storage enclosure slots.
Note
There are two I/O panels mounted in the rear of the cabinet. For SDI
cables start mounting on the right panel. Mount the cables of the first
SDI storage device on the bottom connectors of the right panel. The
second one in the middle and the third one on top of the right panel.
Depending of the storage elements mounted an DSSI/SDI panel might
be mounted as left panel or a SDI panel with the possibility to connect
additional three storage enclosures.
For RA9X Storage devices use the LF connector slots.

2. Connect each power cord to the ac power input on the rear of the storage
element, near the circuit breaker. See Figure 7–3.
3. Before applying power to the cabinet, turn to (Section 3.19) for information
about the power controller switches, disk drive voltage selector switch, and
the circuit breaker.

7–10 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

Figure 7–3 Storage Element Voltage Selector Switch/Circuit Breaker

DRIVE
REAR

DRIVE
CIRCUIT
BREAKER

AC POWER
INPUT

VOLT

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
SWITCH

120V
OR
240V

POWER
SUPPLY
CXO-2135C

Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements 7–11

7.3 Add-On of SDI Disk Drive Installation

7.3.5 Storage Element Voltage Selector Switch
Before applying power to the storage elements, Make sure the proper operating
voltage (100/120V or 220/240V) has been selected for your area of operation.
Refer to Figure 7–3. Use the following procedure to select the proper storage
element operating voltage:
1. Locate the line voltage selector switch. ( The line voltage selector switch
is located on the storage element rear panel, to the right of the circuit
breaker, when facing the rear of the drive. This switch can be seen through
holes in the storage element rear power supply panel).
2. Using a non-conductive pointed object, slide the switch into the voltage
selection position applicable to your site.

7.3.6 Storage Element Circuit Breaker
The storage element circuit breaker is located at the rear of the disk drive,
near the center, on the storage element power supply. Refer to Figure 7–3.

7.3.7 Applying Power to the DECArray300 Cabinet System
After all storage element(s) have been installed in the cabinet, and all cabling
has been connected, use the following procedure to apply power to the cabinet
and its components:
1. Make sure all storage element are switched to the proper voltage for your
site (storage element voltage selector switches).
2. Set the bus/off/on bus switch on the power controller (marked on the front
panel) to the proper position. Refer to Figure 3–12.
3. Make sure the storage element and power controller circuit breakers are in
the OFF position.
4. Plug the cabinet power cable into the wall outlet.
5. Turn the power controller circuit breaker to the ON (up) position.
6. Turn the circuit breaker for each storage element to the ON position.

7–12 Installation and Preparation of the Add-On SDI Storage Elements

8
Installation Troubleshooting
This chapter explains what to do if you detect problems during the installation
of the SF7x storage enclosure.
The procedures in this chapter involve taking devices on- and off-line. This
causes a failure in the communications with the devices affected, resulting in
potential user problems. For this reason, the system manager should perform
an orderly shutdown of all DSSI integrated storage elements (ISEs) before any
troubleshooting. Refer to the service or maintenance manuals for the device.

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure
This section presents symptoms of a failed device, the probable cause or causes
of the failure, and the corrective action to take for correcting the failure. Much
of the corrective action calls either for taking a device or devices off-line or for
removing power from the enclosure containing the failed device.
WARNING
Take all ESD and safety precautions when handling the devices, more
specifically, when taking a device off-line or when removing a device.
Failure to do so will damage the device.

Use the following basic steps for all troubleshooting that you perform for the
Rx7x disk ISE in an SF7x storage enclosure, as it resides in an Sx300 storage
array:
1. Inspect the ISE’s operator control panel (OCP). Is a Fault indicator lit? If
so, press the Fault button and read the error code.
2. Access the ISE in question. Open the front or rear of the SF7x enclosure
and gain access to the ISE’s various cables and check that they are seated
correctly.
3. Run various tests on the ISE by using DUP.

Installation Troubleshooting 8–1

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

4. According to the findings from the error codes and results from DUP, repair
or replace the ISE.
5. Run EVCXE configuration programs, EVCXF configuration programs, or
both.
6. Verify the repair or replacement of the ISE with DRVTST and DRVEXR
under DUP.
7. Return the system to the user.
Use Table 8–1 to isolate a failure in an SF7x storage enclosure.
Table 8–1 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptoms

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

No OCP indicators are
lit.

SF7x enclosure is
not plugged in or
not turned on.

At the rear of the SF7x
enclosure, plug in the ac
power cord or turn on the
SF7x.

Drive dc power
switch is off.

At the front of the SF7x
enclosure, turn on the drive
dc power switch.

OCP is not plugged
in or seated firmly.

Press the OCP firmly in
place.

Bad OCP.

Configure and replace a new
OCP.

Bad TTM.

Configure and replace a new
TTM.

Faulty Rx7x disk
ISE.

Press lit Fault button, then
read fault code and replace
failed FRU.

Conflicting DSSI ID
numbers.

Verify correct DSSI ID
switch settings on KFMSA
module, SF7x, and magazine
tape subsystems for that
bus.

Single Fault indicator lit
on OCP.

(continued on next page)

8–2 Installation Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Table 8–1 (Cont.) Troubleshooting Chart
Symptoms

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

Multiple Fault
indicators lit on OCP.

Conflicting DSSI ID
number.

Verify correct DSSI ID
switch settings on KFMSA
module, SF7x, and magazine
tape subsystems for that
bus.

Bad OCP.

Configure and install a new
OCP.

Bad DSSI cables.

Isolate with DSSI bus
meter1 and replace.

Symptoms

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

One or more indicators
continue to cycle.

Conflicting DSSI ID
numbers.

Verify correct DSSI ID switch
settings on KFMSA module,
SF7x, and magazine tape
subsystems for that bus.

One ISE is not
accessible.

DC power to ISE is
not on.

Turn on dc power switch.

Bad ISE drive
module.

Replace ISE drive module.

Bad DSSI cables.

Isolate with DSSI bus
meter1 and replace.

Bad remote front
cable.

Replace cable.

Bad power harness.

Replace power harness.

RFP cables are
not plugged in the
SF7x TTM or ISE.

Check that both ends of
RFP cables are plugged in.

Bad OCP ID
switch.

Reconfigure and replace
OCP.

Bad RFP cable.

Replace appropriate RFP
cable.

ISE is not seen or seen
at unexpected DSSI ID
value.

Symptoms

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

Fan is not spinning and
power supply LED is lit.

Bad power supply.

Replace power supply.

1 The DSSI bus meter part number is 29–28008–01.

(continued on next page)

Installation Troubleshooting 8–3

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Table 8–1 (Cont.) Troubleshooting Chart
Symptoms

Fan is not spinning and
power supply LED is not
lit, but SF7x enclosure is
on.

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

Bad fan.

Replace fan.

Bad TTM.

Configure a new TTM and
replace.

Bad power supply.

Replace power supply.

Bad power cord.

Replace cord.

Bad TTM.

Configure a new TTM and
replace.

Note
The DSSI bus meter, or DBM, is a small, easily portable device
used to look at bus signals in real-time as well as to verify DSSI ID
numbers. The DBM can quickly locate faulty cables or duplicate DSSI
ID numbers on a given DSSI bus.

8.1.1 Removing an Rx7x Disk ISE from an SF7x Storage Enclosure
This section provides the procedure for removing an Rx7x disk ISE from an
SF7x storage enclosure.
WARNING
Take all possible ESD precautions when unpacking the Rx7x disk ISEs.
Wear a correctly grounded ESD strap.
Have an orderly shutdown of the SF7x enclosure containing the disk
ISE performed. Refer to the system documentation.

1. Power down the SF7x enclosure.
a. Take each existing Rx7x disk ISE on that DSSI bus off-line (Figure 8–1)
by pressing and releasing each Ready button on the operator control
panel (OCP). The button indicators go out.
b. Press and release the drive dc power switches for all the ISEs on that
DSSI bus.

8–4 Installation Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Set the ac power switch on the rear of the enclosure to 0.

Figure 8–1 Powering Down the SF7x Storage Enclosure
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

2. Remove the Rx7x disk ISE.
a. Remove the SF7x enclosure front cover. See Figure 8–2. Loosen the
screws and lift off the covers.

Installation Troubleshooting 8–5

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Figure 8–2 SF7x Front Cover Removal
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

b. Loosen the wedges on the disk ISE.
c.

Disconnect all cables to the disk ISE as shown in Figure 8–3.

d. Remove the Rx7x disk ISE as shown in Figure 8–4. Slide out the disk
ISE gently, while holding all cables out of the way. Do not force the
disk ISE.

8–6 Installation Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Figure 8–3 Disconnecting the Cables

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
SI R
DS
ID

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
r
d yP
ea

u lt

SI
DS
ID
di

e Fa
r it t
W tec
yP r o

DSSI CABLE

u lt

10-PIN
OCP CABLE

6-PIN DRIVE
POWER CABLE

SHR-X0135A-90

3. Unpack the replacement Rx7x disk ISE:
a. Open the shipping carton.
b. Remove the disk ISE wrapped in the protective wrapper.
c.

Open the protective wrapper and remove the disk ISE. Discard the
desiccant bags.

d. Place the disk ISE on the protective wrapper.
4. Remove the skid plate and wedges from the faulty disk ISE and install
them on the replacement disk ISE. See Figure 8–5.

Installation Troubleshooting 8–7

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Figure 8–4 Rx7x Disk ISE Removal

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
SI R
DS
ID

eF
r it t
Wo t e c
r
d yP

SKID PLATE
RETAINING CLIP

SI
DS
ID
di

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
d yP r

u lt

SKID PLATE
SKID PLATE
RETAINING TAB

NOTE TO ILLUSTRATOR:
This was created by

rotating SHR_x1074A_89_SCN

LOCATION

RW,Z120

SHR-X0135-90
THIS REPRESENTS
A RF72

RF72
SHR-X0128-90-SCN

SKID PLATE
GUIDE

SHR-X0136A-90

5. Orient the Rx7x disk ISE as shown in Figure 8–6 and install the disk ISE
in the enclosure. Slide the disk ISE gently into place, while holding all
cables out of the way. Do not force the disk ISE.
6. Verify that the disk ISE is locked into place and tighten the wedges.
7. Connect all cables as shown in Figure 8–7. Connectors are keyed so that
the cables cannot be installed incorrectly.
8. Replace the front cover on the SF7x enclosure. See Figure 8–8.

8–8 Installation Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Figure 8–5 Rx7x Wedges and Skid Plate

NOTE TO ILLUSTRATOR:
This illustration is

RF72

at .30% of original

WEDGE

SKID PLATE

SHR-X0158A-90

Proceed to Section 8.1.2.

8.1.2 Bringing the Rx7x Disk ISE On-Line
This section provides the procedure for bringing all the ISEs in the SF7x
enclosure on-line and for setting DSSI ID numbers.
1. Make sure that the DSSI ID switches (behind the door on the OCP) are set
correctly. For positions 1, 2, 4, and 5, they are LR:1, RR:4, LF:2, RF:3. For
positions 3 and 6, they are LR:6, RR:6, LF:5, RF:5.
2. Place the ac power switch at the rear of the SF7x enclosure to the 1 or on
position.
3. Press all drive dc power switches.

Installation Troubleshooting 8–9

8.1 Troubleshooting the SF7x Storage Enclosure

Figure 8–6 Rx7x Disk ISE Orientation

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
SI R
DS
ID

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
r
d yP

u lt

SKID PLATE
RETAINING CLIP

SI
DS
ID
di

e Fa
r it t
W tec
y ro
ad P
gi

u lt

SKID PLATE
SKID PLATE
RETAINING TAB

NOTE TO ILLUSTRATOR:
This was created by

rotating SHR_x1074A_89_SCN

LOCATION

RW,Z120

SHR-X0135-90
THIS REPRESENTS
A RF72

RF72
SHR-X0128-90-SCN

SKID PLATE
GUIDE

SHR-X0136A-90

4. Press all four Ready buttons on that OCP, one at a time.
5. If no Fault indicators are lit, then continue. If a Fault indicator is
lit, recycle the dc power once. If the failure appears again, refer to
Section 8.1.1.
6. Run the EVCXE or EVCXF programs to add the new disk ISE to the
configuration and to change any disk ISE internal parameters, if necessary.
7. Update the system configuration sheet.
8. Run DRVTST and DRVEXR (under DUP) to verify the correct operation of
the new disk ISEs.
9. Return the system to the user.

8–10 Installation Troubleshooting

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

Figure 8–7 Cabling the Rx7x Disk ISE

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
SI R
DS
ID

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
r
d yP
ea

u lt

SI
DS
ID
di

e Fa
r it t
W tec
yP r o

DSSI CABLE

u lt

10-PIN
OCP CABLE

6-PIN DRIVE
POWER CABLE

SHR-X0135A-90

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem
Refer to the magazine tape subsystem documentation for troubleshooting
information.
This section presents symptoms of a failed device, the probable cause or causes
of the failure, and the corrective action to be taken to correct the failure. any
of the corrective action steps call for either taking a device or devices off-line or
removing power from the enclosure containing the failed device.
WARNING
Take all ESD and safety precautions in handling the devices with
respect to taking the device off-line and in the physical removal of the

Installation Troubleshooting 8–11

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

Figure 8–8 SF7x Front Cover Replacement

OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

device. Failure to do so will result in a decrease in system performance
and damage to the device itself.

8–12 Installation Troubleshooting

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

8.2.1 Operator Control Panel Fault Indicators
The light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the operator control panel of the tape
magazine subsystem will light to indicator errors and faults as they occur in
the subsystem. These errors and faults are found in Table 8–2.
Table 8–2 Operator Control Panel Fault Indicators
LED Lit

Condition
With the REJECT LED lit

Position 6

Indicates an extra cartridge present in tape ISE.

Position 5

Indicates an problem in the magazine.
With the FAULT LED lit

Position 6

Indicates an loader fault.

Position 5

Indicates an tape ISE fault.

Position 4

Indicates an controller module fault.

Should any of the above exist, refer to the magazine tape subsystem owner’s
and service manuals.

8.2.2 Fault Matrix
The fault matrix Table 8–3 describes possible scenarios associated with FRU
failures not detectable via diagnostics.
Table 8–3 Fault Matrix
Minor FRU

Possible Failure Scenario

Interlock Switch

After sliding the unit forward for head cleaning
or service, the Power indicator remains on.

Internal Communications Cable

After replacing either a faulty ISE or subsystem
assembly, the power is on, but the unit still fails
MDM.

Handle Motor Assembly

Same as above. Characterized by subsystem
retry errors.
(continued on next page)

Installation Troubleshooting 8–13

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

Table 8–3 (Cont.) Fault Matrix
Minor FRU

Possible Failure Scenario

Power Supply Assembly

When connected to a known good source of
power, and power switch is set to ON, the unit
does not power up and the Power indicator
remains off.

Operator Control Assembly

After replacing either a faulty controller module
or other FRU, either the OCP buttons or
indicators do not function.
All indicators do not come on briefly at power
on.

Fan

Visual Inspection Required.

This section describes error conditions, failure influences, soft error rates, and
how to run an error log code. See Table 8–4 for a list of common failures,
causes, and fixes.

8.2.3 Error Conditions
The word error is sometimes misunderstood. Recoverable (soft) errors are a
fact of life in the tape world. There are many reasons why a soft error can
occur.
The tape media is not perfect, drive heads eventually wear out and start
producing higher error rates, heads can become contaminated, or foreign debris
can pass through the tape path. If you examine the drive error count, you will
see soft errors, events, and hard errors. For example, you will receive an error
if you give the wrong label name during a mount. Be sure the errors you are
interpreting are indicative of a real hardware problem before swapping out the
drive.

8.2.4 Common Failure Influences
The tape ISE may appear to be the failing unit due to the operation being
performed at the time of failure (such as back-up). However, it is important to
understand that there are many factors that influence failures.
Some of the more common factors are:
•

Defective media

•

Operator or user errors

•

Incorrect back up commands

8–14 Installation Troubleshooting

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

•

Poor power or grounding
Note
Make sure that any problem you encounter is not due to the above
causes before you replace the drive.

Table 8–4 Common Failures, Causes, and Fixes
Symptom

Probable Cause

Possible Fix

Volume not software enabled

Drive is not loaded or was
unloaded by software

Make sure that the
yellow LED is on (tape
loaded and ready for
use).

TK50 formatted cartridge in
a TK70 drive

Use correct cartridge.

Bad cartridge or incorrectly
written calibration tracks

Try another cartridge.

Bad drive or dirty head

Clean head and/or
replace drive.

Failure to mount or initialize
with new media

Bad media

Clean head and retry
with known good
media.

All three LEDs blinking

Drive failed self-test or
detected a hard error during
operation

Attempt to clear error
by pushing the unload
button. If the error
won’t clear, you have a
drive hardware failure
or a power problem.

Green LED blinking

Calibration error

Clear error by
pressing the unload
button. Try another
cartridge. If the error
repeats, you have
a drive hardware
failure or more than
one bad cartridge
(physically damaged
or bad calibration
tracks).
(continued on next page)

Installation Troubleshooting 8–15

8.2 Troubleshooting the Magazine Tape Subsystem

Table 8–4 (Cont.) Common Failures, Causes, and Fixes
Symptom

Probable Cause

Possible Fix

Cartridge stuck in drive with
tape on take up reel

Hard drive error

Attempt recovery by
pressing the unload
button.

Drive leader runaway

Mispositioned cartridge
leader

Inspect cartridge
leader for correct
position. Retire
cartridge from use
if leader cannot be
repositioned.

8.2.5 Soft Error Rates
None of the cartridges contain perfect tape. All tapes contain some number
of dropouts. Although these are imperfections in the tape, the tape is not
considered to be defective. The hardware and software are designed to deal
with these known imperfections. Dropout testing is performed on samples of
media by our vendors and meet all of the specifications of Digital Equipment
Corporation.
There are many variables that can cause soft errors. In fact, errors are
somewhat of a misnomer since soft errors are considered to be events. In the
case of soft errors, it is important to realize that no data has been lost. For a
write, the data is rewritten. For a read, retries are performed.
Some of the variables that create soft errors are:
•

Media dropouts

•

Temperature of media (not acclimatized)

•

System bus activity

•

Applications

•

Head wear

•

Contamination

Changes in soft error rates for any particular drive and cartridge are more
significant than any absolute number of soft errors. This is due to the variables
described above.

8–16 Installation Troubleshooting

A
SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling
Diagrams
This appendix contains cabling diagrams for the Sx300 storage array
variations (DSSI), in both the single-host Section A.3 and dual-host Section A.4
configurations. This chapter also informs about some general rules about
cabling single host,dual host or in stripe set mode.

A.1 General Cabling Rules
A.1.1 Single Host Configurations
In single host configurations port P1 to P4 is used. The left site of the DSSI
panel of the SF1/SF2/SF4/SF5 will be connected to the ports. SF3 and SF6
will operate in split bus mode. In case tape loader systems will be mounted
into the cabinet the TF1/TF2/TF3/TF4 will be connected to P1/P2/P3/P4. The
bottom site of the tape loader will be connected to right site of the DSSI panel
of a mounted SF disk enclosure. For example TF1 bottom will be connected to
SF1 right connector.
Table A–1 Single Host Configuration
Device

LEFT

RIGHT

TOP

BOTTOM

SF1

Term

P01

N/A

SF2

Term

P02

N/A

SF3

SF2–L

SF1–L

N/A

SF4

Term

P04

N/A

SF5

Term

P05

N/A

SF6

SF5–L

SF4–L

N/A

N/A
(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–1

A.1 General Cabling Rules

Table A–1 (Cont.) Single Host Configuration
Device

LEFT

RIGHT

TOP

BOTTOM

TF1

N/A

P01

Term

TF2

N/A

P02

Term

TF3

N/A

P03

Term

TF4

N/A

P04

Term

TF1&SF1

Term

TF1–B

P01

SF1–R

TF2&SF2

Term

TF2–B

P02

SF2–R

TF3&SF4

Term

TF2–B

P03

SF3–R

Explanation
Left—Left DSSI connector on SFx storage enclosure)
Right—Right DSSI connector on SFx Storage enclosure)
TOP—TOP DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
Bottom—Bottom DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
P0x—DSSI port x of the I/O panel
SF2–L—Left DSSI connector of the SF2 Storage enclosure)
Term—Terminator
In case SF3 and SF6 are mounted in split-bus, connect SF3 & SF6 to SF1/SF2/
SF4/SF5 instead of the terminator.
See the detail to the cabling diagrams.

A.1.2 Dual Host Configurations
For dual host all SF Disk drive enclosures will operate in through bus mode.
Table A–2 Cabling Overview Dual Host System
Device

LEFT

RIGHT

TOP

BOTTOM

SF1

P01

P07

N/A

SF2

P02

P08

N/A

SF3

P03

P09

N/A

SF4

P04

P10

N/A

SF5

P05

P11

N/A

N/A
(continued on next page)

A–2 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.1 General Cabling Rules

Table A–2 (Cont.) Cabling Overview Dual Host System
Device

LEFT

RIGHT

TOP

BOTTOM

SF6

P06

P12

N/A

TF1

N/A

P01

P07

TF2

N/A

P02

P08

TF3

N/A

P03

P09

TF4

N/A

P04

P10

SF1 & TF1

P07

TF1–B

P01

SF1–R

SF2 & TF2

P08

TF2–B

P02

SF2–R

SF3 & TF3

P09

TF3–B

P03

SF3–R

Explanation
Left—Left DSSI connector on SFx storage enclosure)
Right—Right DSSI connector on SFx Storage enclosure)
TOP—TOP DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
Bottom—Bottom DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
P0x—DSSI port x of the I/O panel
SF2–L—Left DSSI connector of the SF2 Storage enclosure)
TERM—Terminator
For combinations of Tape Loader with Disk Storage enclosure like TF1 & SF1
or TF2 & SF2 or TF3 & SF3 connect the bottom connector tape loader with
the right DSSI connector of the SF storage element. For example connect the
bottom connector of the TF1 with the right connector of SF1.

A.1.3 Stripeset Configurations
This section contains cabling diagrams for DECarray stripeset configurations.
•

The SF7x storage enclosure must operate in split-bus mode

•

DSSI bus termination is supplied by the transition termination module
(TTM) inside the SF7x storage enclosure

•

Stripes are supported only in a single-system configuration

•

DSSI termination of the Tape Loader magazine by terminators in bottom
DSSI connector.

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–3

A.1 General Cabling Rules

Table A–3 Stripeset Configuration
Device

LEFT

RIGHT

TOP

BOTTOM

SF1

P01

P07

N/A

SF2

P02

P08

N/A

SF3

P03

P09

N/A

SF4

P04

P10

N/A

SF5

P05

P11

N/A

SF6

P06

P12

N/A

TF1

N/A

P06

Term

TF2

N/A

P05

Term

TF3

N/A

P04

Term

TF4

N/A

P03

Term

Explanation
Left—Left DSSI connector on SFx storage enclosure)
Right—Right DSSI connector on SFx Storage enclosure)
TOP—TOP DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
Bottom—Bottom DSSI connector on TFx Storage enclosure)
P0x—DSSI port x of the I/O panel
SF2–L—Left DSSI connector of the SF2 Storage enclosure)
Term—Terminator
The cabling for dual-host and stripeset is very similar. In case a tape loader
subsystem and SFx Storage enclosures are mounted, the SFx and the TFx will
not be connected to each other.

A–4 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.2 Cabling Diagrams

A.2 Cabling Diagrams
Table A–4 explains the nomenclature used in the cabling diagrams.
Table A–4 Cabling Diagram Key
T and B
R and L

Represent the top and bottom, right and left DSSI connectors in the
rear of the magazine tape subsystems and SF7x storage enclosures.

TFx1
SFx2

TF is the designation for a magazine tape subsystem.
SF is the designation for a SF7x storage enclosure.

Refers to the port number on the DSSI I/O panel.

Cables

Three DSSI cables are used:
BC21Q–3F = 42-inch (unit to unit)
BC21R–5L = 70-inch (Sx300 I/O panel to unit)
BC21Q–09 = 108-inch (Sx300 to system)

T at a DSSI connector stands for a DSSI terminator
(12–31281–01).

1 There are only four magazine tape subsystems per Sx300 storage array.
2 There are up to six SF7X storage enclosures per Sx300 storage array.

Table A–5 lists the diagrams in this appendix.
Table A–5 Cabling Diagram List
Title

Reference

Single-Host Configurations
Sx300 with one SF7x element

Figure A–1

Sx300 with two SF7x elements

Figure A–2

Sx300 with three SF7x elements

Figure A–3

Sx300 with four SF7x elements

Figure A–4

Sx300 with five SF7x elements

Figure A–5

Sx300 with six SF7x elements

Figure A–6

Sx300 with tape magazine elements only

Figure A–7
(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–5

A.2 Cabling Diagrams

Table A–5 (Cont.) Cabling Diagram List
Dual-Host Configurations
Dual-Host Configurations
Sx300 with one SF7x element

Figure A–8

Sx300 with two SF7x elements

Figure A–9

Sx300 with three SF7x elements

Figure A–10

Sx300 with four SF7x elements

Figure A–11

Sx300 with five SF7x elements

Figure A–12

Sx300 with six SF7x elements

Figure A–13

Sx300 with tape magazine elements only

Figure A–14

A.3 Single-Host Configurations
This section contains cabling diagrams for Sx300 storage array variations in
the single-host configuration. See Figure A–1 through Figure A–7.
Note the following:
•

DSSI bus termination is supplied by the TTM module inside the SF7x
storage enclosures in position 3 and 5.

•

The SF7x storage enclosures in positions 3 and 5 must be operating in
split-bus mode.

•

If a DSSI bus is not connected to a SF7x storage enclosure in position 3 or
5, then DSSI bus termination is accomplished by using a DSSI terminator
(part number 12–31281–01).

•

Split-bus mode is supported only in the single-host configuration.

A–6 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–1 Sx300 with One SF7x

P6
o

P7
o

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–7

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–1 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

P6
o

P7
o

TF1

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–8 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–1 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

B
T

TF1

TF2
3

P6
o

P7
o

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–9

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–1 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x
c
T

B
T

TF1

TF2

TF3

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–10 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–1 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

B
T

TF1

TF2

to P4

B
T

TF3

TF4
1

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–11

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–2 Sx300 with Two SF7x

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–12 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–2 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–13

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–2 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–14 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–2 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x
T

TF1

TF2

TF3

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER__CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–15

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–2 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

TF2

B
T

TF3

TF4
1

SF2

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

POWERCONTROLLER

A–16 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–3 Sx300 with Three SF7x

4
L

SF 3
1
L

2
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–17

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–3 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1
L

SF3
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–18 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–3 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

4
L

SF3
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–19

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–3 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1

TF2

4
L

TF3

SF3
1

2
L

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

A–20 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–4 Sx300 with Four SF7x

SF4

SF3
1

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER__CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–21

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–4 (Cont.) Sx300 with Four SF7x

TF1
3
L

SF3

SF4
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–22 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–4 (Cont.) Sx300 with Four SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

SF3

SF4
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–23

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–5 Sx300 with Five SF7x

6
L

SF5
4

3
L

SF4

SF3
1

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–24 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–5 (Cont.) Sx300 with Five SF7x

6
L

TF1

SF5
3

4
L

SF3

SF4
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–25

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–6 Sx300 with Six SF7x

5
L

SF6

SF5
3

SF4
2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3
1

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER CONTROLLER

A–26 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–7 Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

P6
o

P7
o

TF1

P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–27

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–7 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

B
T

TF1

P1 P2
o
o

TF2

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–28 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–7 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)
T

B
T

TF1

TF2

T
B

TF3

P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–29

A.3 Single-Host Configurations

Figure A–7 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

B
T

TF1

TF2

B
T

TF3

TF4
1

P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

A–30 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations
This section contains cabling diagrams for Sx300 storage array variations in
the dual-host configuration. See Figure A–8 through Figure A–14.
Note the following:
•

DSSI bus termination is supplied by the KFMSA modules installed in each
host system.

•

All KFMSA modules installed in each host system must be set to the same
DSSI ID. DSSI ID 7 is used in one host system, and DSSI ID 6 is used in
the other.

•

All SF7x storage enclosures operate in through-bus mode.

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–31

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–8 Sx300 with One SF7x

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–32 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–8 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

TF1
L

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–33

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–8 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER__CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–34 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–8 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

TF1

TF2

TF3

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CON.

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–35

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–8 (Cont.) Sx300 with One SF7x

to P2

TF1

TF2

to P4

TF3

TF4
1

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P/C

A–36 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–9 Sx300 with Two SF7x

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER−CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–37

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–9 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–38 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–9 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–39

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–9 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

TF2

TF3

SF1
P1
o

P2
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

POWER_CON.

(continued on next page)

A–40 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–9 (Cont.) Sx300 with Two SF7x

TF1

TF2

to P4

TF3

TF4
1

SF1
P1
o

to P2

P2
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

P/C

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–41

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–10 Sx300 with Three SF7x

4
L

SF3
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

P−CON.

(continued on next page)

A–42 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–10 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1
3

4
L

SF3
1
L

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

P−CON.

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–43

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–10 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

4
L

SF3
1
L

2
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

P−CON.

(continued on next page)

A–44 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–10 (Cont.) Sx300 with Three SF7x

TF1

TF2

4
L

SF3

TF3
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

P−CON.

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–45

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–11 Sx300 with Four SF7x

SF4

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3
1

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

P−CON.

(continued on next page)

A–46 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–11 (Cont.) Sx300 with Four SF7x

TF1
L

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3

SF4
L

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

P−CON.

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–47

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–11 (Cont.) Sx300 with Four SF7x

TF1

TF2
3

SF2

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3

SF4
L

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P−CON.

A–48 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

P9
o

P10 P11 P12
o
o
o

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–12 Sx300 with Five SF7x

6
L

to P11

to P5

SF5
3
L

SF4

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3
1

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

SF5L

SF5R

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–49

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–12 (Cont.) Sx300 with Five SF7x

6
L

B
to P5

to P11
TF1

SF5
3

SF4
SF3
1
L

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9 P10 P11 P12
o
o
o
o

SF5L

to port SF5R

A–50 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–13 Sx300 with Six SF7x

3
L

to P12

to P6

to P11

SF6

SF4

SF1
P1 P2
o
o

SF3
1

to P5

SF5
3

SF2
P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

SF6R

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11P12
o
o
o
+
SF6L
SF5L

to SF5R

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–51

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–14 Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

TF1

P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–52 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–14 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

TF1

P1
o

P2
o

TF2

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWERCONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–53

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–14 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

TF1

TF2

TF3

P1
o

P2
o

P3
o

P4
o

P5
o

P6
o

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10
o

P11
o

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

(continued on next page)

A–54 SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams

A.4 Dual-Host Configurations

Figure A–14 (Cont.) Sx300 (Magazine Tape Subsystems Only)

TF1

TF2

P2
o

to P10

TF4

TF3

P1
o

to P4

P3
o

P5
P6
o o
o
|
to TF4T

P7
o

P8
o

P9
o

P10 P11
o
o
|
to TF4B

P12
o

POWER CONTROLLER

SF300 DSSI Storage Array Cabling Diagrams A–55

B
Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit
This appendix describes how to install the Sx72–UK upgrade kit while the
host system and the disk integrated storage elements (ISEs) in the Sx72–HK
storage enclosure are off-line. See Section B.1 for instructions on how to take a
disk ISE off-line.
To make sure the integrity of the host system, follow the steps in this
procedure in order and exactly as instructed.
Note
You must upgrade the two-drive Sx72–HK storage enclosure to contain
four drives before adding any other Sx72 storage enclosures on that
bus of the Sx300 storage array.
Only one Sx72–HK storage enclosure can exist in an Sx300 storage
array at one time.

WARNING
The following procedure assumes that the Sx300 storage array, and the
Sx72 storage enclosures and magazine tape subsystems in the array,
have been correctly installed and configured according to the standard
bus and configuration guidelines in this guide.

Locate the system configuration sheet and make sure that it is filled out.
•

At this point, the host system must be brought down to continue.

•

If the system configuration sheet reflects a configuration other than
what is recommended in this guide, you must maintain that particular
configuration throughout this procedure and work to make sure that no
two devices on a DSSI bus have the same DSSI ID number. Should this

Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit B–1

situation exist, do NOT attempt to use this procedure while the system is
on-line.
Note
Make sure that no two ISEs have the same DSSI ID number.
If this upgrade is to be followed by the installation of another Sx72
storage enclosure, a magazine tape subsystem, or both, the host system
must be brought down according to the system documentation.

B.1 Securing the Array for the Upgrade
Once the host systems have been correctly brought down, perform the following
steps:
1. Take each ISE installed in the Sx300 storage array off-line.
a. For all Sx72 storage enclosures, press all operator control panel (OCP)
Ready buttons to their out position.
b. For all magazine tape subsystems, press the Load/Unload button. Wait
until the cartridge is returned to the magazine and the In-Use light
emitting diode (LED) is extinguished.
2. For all Sx72 storage enclosures, press all drive dc power switches to their
out position.
3. For all Sx72 storage enclosures and magazine tape subsystems, turn the ac
power switches at the rear of each to their 0 or off position.
4. At the rear of the array, turn the power controller circuit breaker off.

B.2 Installing the RF72 Disk ISE into an Sx72–HK Storage
Enclosure
This section describes the steps to install two RF72 disk ISEs into an Sx72–HK
storage enclosure.
WARNING
Do not disconnect or disturb the existing DSSI cables and terminators
on the present Sx72 storage enclosures, magazine tape subsystems, or
on the Sx300 storage array I/O panel.
Customer data corruption could result.

B–2 Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit

B.2 Installing the RF72 Disk ISE into an Sx72–HK Storage Enclosure

Take all possible ESD precautions when unpacking the RF72 disk
ISEs. Wear a correctly grounded ESD strap.

CAUTION
Only one Sx72 storage enclosure inner assembly should be extended on
the slide mount at a time.

The following steps describe how to install the two-drive Sx72–UK upgrade
into an Sx72–HK storage enclosure with two RF72 disk drives. The upgrade
includes the two RF72 disk ISEs to be installed in the two front positions of an
Sx72–HK enclosure.
1. To unpack an RF72 disk ISE:
a. Open the shipping carton.
b. Remove the disk ISE wrapped in the protective wrapper.
c.

Open the protective wrapper and remove the disk ISE. Discard the
desiccant bags.

d. Place the disk ISE on the protective wrapper.
2. Install the RF72 disk ISEs.
WARNING
Take all possible ESD precautions when handling the RF72 disk ISEs.
Wear a correctly grounded ESD strap.

a. Remove the Sx72 storage enclosure front cover (see Figure B–1) by
loosening the screws and lifting the cover straight off.
b. Orient the RF72 disk ISE as shown in Figure B–2 and install the
disk ISE in the enclosure. Slide the disk ISE gently into place, while
holding all cables out of the way. Do not force the disk ISE.

Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit B–3

B.2 Installing the RF72 Disk ISE into an Sx72–HK Storage Enclosure

Figure B–1 Sx72 Front Cover Removal
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

Verify that the disk ISE is locked into place and tighten the wedges.

d. Connect the cables as shown in Figure B–3 in the following order:
6-pin power cable, 10-pin OCP cable, and 50-pin DSSI cable. The
connectors are keyed so that the cables cannot be installed incorrectly.

B–4 Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit

B.2 Installing the RF72 Disk ISE into an Sx72–HK Storage Enclosure

Figure B–2 RF72 Disk ISE Orientation

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
SI R
DS
ID

eF
r it t
Wo t e c
r
d yP

SKID PLATE
RETAINING CLIP

SI
DS
ID
di

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
d yP r

u lt

SKID PLATE
SKID PLATE
RETAINING TAB

NOTE TO ILLUSTRATOR:
This was created by

rotating SHR_x1074A_89_SCN

LOCATION

RW,Z120

SHR-X0135-90
THIS REPRESENTS
A RF72

RF72
SHR-X0128-90-SCN

SKID PLATE
GUIDE

SHR-X0136A-90

Replace the front cover on the Sx72 storage enclosure. See Figure B–4.

B.3 Powering Up the ISEs
Once all of the previous steps have been performed, use the following steps to
power up the ISEs in the Sx300 storage array:
1. At the rear of the array, turn the 881 power controller circuit breaker on.
2. For all Sx72 storage enclosures and magazine tape subsystems, turn the ac
power switches at the rear of each to their 1 or on position.
3. For all Sx72 storage enclosures, press all drive dc power switches to their
in position.

Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit B–5

B.3 Powering Up the ISEs

Figure B–3 Cabling the RF72 Disk ISE

NOTE TO
ILLUSTRATOR:
front panel for this
hardware is SHR_X1127_89
ISOL and reduced
17/64 (.265625)
e
SI R
DS
ID

SI
DS
ID
g
di

e Fa
r it t
Wo t e c
d yP r
it

e Fa
r it t
W tec
y ro
ad P

u lt

DSSI CABLE

u lt

10-PIN
OCP CABLE

6-PIN DRIVE
POWER CABLE

SHR-X0135A-90

4. Place each disk ISE installed in the Sx300 storage array on-line by pressing
all OCP Ready buttons to their in position.

B–6 Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit

B.3 Powering Up the ISEs

Figure B–4 Sx72 Front Cover Replacement
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

FRONT COVER
CAPTIVE SCREWS

FRONT COVER
DOOR

ENCLOSURE
CAPTIVE SCREWS

DRIVE DC POWER SWITCHES

SHR-X0126A-90

Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit B–7

B.4 Bringing the New RF72 Disk ISEs On-Line

B.4 Bringing the New RF72 Disk ISEs On-Line
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for the sections on configuring a single-host and dual-host configuration.
Note that you will be instructed by these sections to perform the following
tasks:
•

Boot VAX/DS on the host systems.

•

Attach the KFMSA modules in each system.

•

Select each KFMSA module in each system.

•

Run EVCXE or EVCXF.

•

Modify certain parameters in the disk ISEs.

•

Make sure that all modified parameters are recorded as permanent values.

•

Verify the communication path with all ISEs on the DSSI buses.

After all of the above have been accomplished successfully, return the systems
and the Sx300 storage array to normal operating mode.

B–8 Installing an Sx72–UK Upgrade Kit

C
Converting a Single-Host Configuration to
a Dual-Host Configuration
This appendix describes how to convert an Sx300 storage array, Sx72 storage
enclosure, or magazine tape subsystem that is configured according to
single-host configuration guidelines to dual-host configuration guidelines.
Make sure that you have the following before starting any procedure:
•

A #1 Phillips screwdriver (part number 29–11001–00)

•

A 1/8-inch hex key (part number 29–26115–00)

•

The KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)

•

The SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–32882–01)
Additional Cables required
You need in addition for every SF7x a cable kit (CK-SF200-LM) .You
need in addition for every tape loader magazine, which isn’t connected
to a SF7x device an additional cable kit (CK-SF200-LM).

WARNING
Only one Sx72 storage enclosure inner assembly should be extended on
the slide mount at a time.
Take all possible ESD precautions when performing this procedure.
Wear a correctly grounded ESD strap.
Perform each step in the order presented.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–1

CAUTION
The following procedure assumes that the Sx300 storage array, and the
Sx72 storage enclosures and magazine tape subsystems in the array,
have been correctly installed and configured according to the standard
bus and configuration guidelines in this installation guide.
Locate the system configuration sheet an example can be found
in Figure C–1 and make sure that it is filled out. If the system
configuration sheet does not exist, fill one out immediately.

Note
The host systems must be taken down to perform any of the steps
in this procedure, unless otherwise stated. Before cabling the Sx300
storage array to the second host system, run the EVCXF configuration
program under VAX/DS and set the DSSI ID number of all KFMSA
modules in the second host system to 6. Refer to the KFMSA Module
Installation and User Manual for instructions on how to change the
KFMSA module DSSI ID number.

C.1 Securing the Array for Conversion
Once the host systems have been correctly brought down, perform the following
steps:
1. Take each integrated storage element (ISE) installed in the Sx300 storage
array off-line.
a. For all Sx72 storage enclosures, press all operator control panel (OCP)
Ready buttons to their out position.
b. For all magazine tape subsystems, press the Load/Unload button. Wait
until the cartridge is returned to the magazine and the In-Use light
emitting diode (LED) is extinguished.
2. For all Sx72 storage enclosures, press all drive dc power switches to their
out position.
3. For all Sx72 storage enclosures and magazine tape subsystems, turn the ac
power switches located at the rear of each to their 0 or off position.

C–2 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.1 Securing the Array for Conversion

Figure C–1 Example of a Single-Host System Configuration Sheet

KFMSA/DSSI Single-host Configuration Sheet

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Tape
0

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
1

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
2

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
3

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
4

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
1

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

RF72
2

RF72
3

RF72
4

System ID

RF72
5

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

0
6

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Tape

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

RF72
5

System ID

RF72
6

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

RF72
6

System ID
Color Code
on Cables

Blue

Color Code
on Cables

Red

SHR-X0109A-90

4. At the rear of the array, turn the power controller circuit breaker off.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–3

C.2 Conversion Procedure

C.2 Conversion Procedure
This section contains the steps to do the following:
•

Convert an Sx72 storage enclosure from split-bus to through-bus mode
(Section C.2.2)

•

Convert an Sx300 storage array, cabled for a single-host configuration, that
contains Sx72 storage enclosures, or magazine tape subsystems, or both, to
a dual-host configuration (Section C.2.3)

•

Label the cables (Section C.2.4)
Fill out a new configuration sheet (Section C.2.4.1)
Fill out the labels (Section C.2.4.2)
Place the labels (Section C.2.4.3)

•

Power up the Sx300 storage array (Section C.2.5)

•

Bring the new dual-host configuration back on-line (Section C.2.6).

•

Verify the operation of the converted Sx300 storage array (Section C.2.7)

Follow each step in the order presented.

C.2.1 Through-Bus to Split-Bus Conversion
1. Do the following if you are installing an SF7x in split bus mode (single-host
only) (see Figure C–2):
CAUTION
To maintain stability, extend only one SF7x storage enclosure or
magazine tape subsystem on the slide mounts at a time.

a. Loosen the four captive slide assembly screws. Slide the inner assembly
out until the drawer locks in the service position.
b. Push the inner assembly forward from the rear.
Note
Do NOT completely remove the SF7x inner drawer assembly from the
extrusion tube and extend only one at a time.

C–4 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

2. Reconfigure the transition termination module (TTM) for split-bus mode by
first moving the small black jumper to the split-bus terminals, then moving
cable connectors to the right pair of sockets.
3. Push the SF7x inner drawer back in, replace the front cover door, and
tighten the four front door screws. To prevent pinching any cables, be sure
that all cables are dressed correctly.

Figure C–2 Changing an SF7x to Split-Bus Mode

SPLIT-BUS MODE

THRU

SPLIT

J11
TO OCP

SHR_X1111_89

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–5

C.2 Conversion Procedure

C.2.2 Split-Bus to Through-Bus Conversion
Use the following steps only if you are converting an Sx72 storage enclosure
in position 3 or 5 of an Sx300 storage array from single-host to dual-host
configuration. Sx72 storage enclosures in position 3 and 5 must be converted to
through-bus mode.
CAUTION
Maintain ESD precautions at all times. Before performing the following
steps, locate the ESD strap in the ESD pouch at the bottom of the front
door.
To maintain stability, extend only one Sx72 storage enclosure or
magazine tape subsystem on the slide mounts at a time.

1. Remove the OCP by firmly grasping the right and left side of the OCP and
pulling the OCP straight off.
2. Loosen the four captive slide assembly screws. At the rear, push the inner
assembly out until the drawer locks in the service position.
Note
Do NOT completely remove the Sx72 inner drawer assembly from the
extrusion tube.

3. Reconfigure the transition termination module (TTM) for through-bus mode
by first moving the small black jumper to the through-bus terminals. Then
move the cable connector from J3 to J5, and the cable connector from J2 to
J4 as shown in Figure C–3.
4. Push the Sx72 inner assembly back into the extrusion tube. To prevent
pinching any cables, be sure that all cables are dressed correctly.
5. Tighten the four captive slide assembly screws.
6. Set the DSSI ID number switches behind the OCP front door of positions
3 and 5 to match those in positions 1, 2, 4, and 5. See Figure C–4 and
Table C–1.
7. Replace the OCP by lining up the taps on the back of the OCP with the
slots on the front of the storage enclosure. Firmly press the right and left
side of the OCP.

C–6 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–3 Changing an Sx72 to Through-Bus Mode

THROUGH-BUS MODE

THRU

SPLIT

J11
TO OCP

SHR_X1110_89

Figure C–4 OCP Indicators and Controls

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128_89

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–7

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Table C–1 DSSI ID Switch Settings (Sx72 Only)
Sx300 Positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 61
Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)

001
010

Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

011
100

1 The switch settings for OCPs in these positions are 0 = down and 1 = up.

C.2.3 Single-Host to Dual-Host Cabling Conversion
Note
Make sure that both host systems and the Sx300 storage array are
off-line and powered down.

This procedure explains the steps to recable a DSSI bus configured for a
single-host application to a DSSI bus configured for a dual-host application.
Figure C–5 shows the five possible single-host bus configurations. Figure C–6
shows the three possible dual-host bus configurations.
The steps describe the conversion of each DSSI bus in the Sx300 storage array
individually. Follow each step for all DSSI buses present in the Sx300 storage
array, paying careful attention to all warnings, cautions, and notes.
The term DSSI bus n (where n = 1 to 6) refers to the DSSI buses used by the
host system, the Sx300 storage array, the Sx72 storage enclosures, and the
magazine tape subsystems. In the single-host configuration, the four DSSI
buses used are:
DSSI bus 1, color code blue
DSSI bus 2, color code red
DSSI bus 3, color code yellow
DSSI bus 4, color code green
In the dual-host configuration, the six DSSI buses used are:
DSSI bus 1, color code blue
DSSI bus 2, color code red
DSSI bus 3, color code yellow
DSSI bus 4, color code green
DSSI bus 5, color code blue with a white strip
DSSI bus 6, color code red with a white strip

C–8 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Use Table C–2 to convert the existing Sx300 storage array from single-host
configured DSSI buses to the dual-host configuration and to Figures C–5 and
C–6 for the actual bus configuration.
Figure C–5 Possible Single-Host Bus Configurations

Magazine

SF72

SF200 I/O

Tape

PORT

Subsystem

Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

PORT

Subsystem
T

108-inch

70-inch

42-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-3F

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SYS

SF200 I/O

42-inch

BC21Q-3F

Magazine
Tape

42-inch

SF200 I/O

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

DSSI TERMINATOR

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

12-31281-01

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SF200 I/O
PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

42-inch
D

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SF200 I/O
PORT

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

SHR-X0167A-90

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–9

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–6 Possible Dual-Host Bus Configurations

SF200 I/O

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

SF72

SF200 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

PORT

42-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-3F

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SF200 I/O

Magazine
Tape

SF200 I/O

PORT

Subsystem

PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SF72
SF200 I/O
PORT

SF200 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

PORT
70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SHR-X0168A-90

Table C–2 Single-Host to Dual-Host Conversion
Single-Host
S1
S21
S31
S4
S51

Dual-Host
D12
D1
D2
D32
D3

1 When converting these buses, remove the DSSI terminator (12–31281–01) and store these
terminators in the ESD pouches on the inside Sx300 storage array front or rear doors.
2 Remove and discard the 42-inch DSSI cables between Sx72 storage enclosures only. Remember
that Sx72 storage enclosures in positions 3 and 5 must be converted from split-bus to through-bus
mode and become a D3 configuration only.

CAUTION
Do not disturb any existing DSSI cables unless otherwise instructed.
Do not remove any existing 42-inch DSSI cables (BC21Q–3F) between
magazine tape subsystems and Sx72 storage enclosures.

C–10 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Install the 70-inch DSSI cables (BC21R–5L) where necessary to complete the
bus connections to the Sx300 I/O panel:
1. Connect one end of the 70-inch DSSI cable to the DSSI connector on the
rear of the Sx72 storage enclosure or magazine tape subsystem.
2. Install the other end to the appropriate port on the Sx300 I/O panel. See
Figure C–7.
Connect the appropriate number of 108-inch DSSI cables (BC21Q–09) to all the
newly installed 70-inch DSSI cables on the Sx300 I/O panel.
Next, connect the other end of the 108-inch DSSI cables to the appropriate
DSSI connector on the system I/O panel.
Note
If you have not changed the KFMSA module DSSI ID numbers in
the other host system to 6, do so at this time. Do NOT attempt to
connect the 108-inch DSSI cables to this host system until the DSSI ID
numbers have been changed. Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation
and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).
Refer to Table A–5 for cabling diagrams of the single-host and dual-host
configurations.

C.2.4 Labeling the Cables
This section describes the steps to label correctly the cables for the VAX 6000
series system, the Sx300 storage array, and its Sx72 storage enclosures and
tape magazine subsystems.
At this point, all steps in the previous sections must be complete.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–11

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–7 Connecting DSSI Cables on the Sx300 I/O Panel

70 INCH
DSSI CABLE

sx300
I/O PANEL

108 INCH
DSSI CABLE

SHR-X0122-90

C.2.4.1 Completing the System Configuration Sheet
At this time, you should be ready to fill out the system configuration sheet. An
example of the sheet is in Figure C–8 and in the KFMSA Module Installation
and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM).
Refer to these examples when filling out the system’s configuration sheet.
Note
Do not attempt to fill out and place the labels until you have completed
the system configuration sheet.
The information from the system configuration sheet is used to fill out
the labels correctly for all DSSI cables, Sx72 storage enclosure OCPs,
and magazine tape subsystem front panels.

C–12 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

You can also refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet
(part number 36–32882–01) for instructions on how to fill out these
labels.

C.2.4.2 Filling Out the Labels
There are two sizes of colored labels: the larger one for the DSSI cables,
and the smaller one for the inside of the Sx72 OCP door, the front panel of a
magazine tape subsystem, and the host system I/O panel.
Refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–
32882–01) for instructions on what information to put on each of the two types
of labels.
For the dual-host configuration, use the following colored labels on the Sx72
OCP doors, the front panels of the magazine tape subsystems, and all DSSI
cables.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–13

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–8 Blank Dual-Host System Configuration Sheet

KFMSA/DSSI Dual-host Configuration Sheet

KFMSA XMI Node #
Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name

System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Sx300 Box #
UNITNUM

System ID

Bus 1
DSSI ID #

Bus 2
DSSI ID #

KFMSA XMI Node #

Color Code
on Cables

Color Code
on Cables
SHR-X0133-90

C–14 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Label Color

Sx300 Port / Sx300 Position

Blue

Port 1, SF1 and TF1 , port 7

Red

Port 2, SF2 and TF2, port 8

Yellow

Port 3, SF3 and TF3, port 9

Green

Port 4, SF4 or TF4, port 10

Blue with white strip

Port 5, SF5, port 11

Red with white strip

Port 6, SF6, port 12

Proceed once you have filled the labels according to the instructions on the
inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part number 36–32882–01).

C.2.4.3 Placing the Labels
Now that the labels have been filled out, place them on the DSSI cables and
the Sx72 OCP doors. Also place a label on the front of the magazine tape
subsystem.
Place cable labels 2 inches behind the DSSI connector on both ends of the DSSI
cable as shown in Figure C–9.
Figure C–9 Placing a Label on a DSSI Cable

LABEL

SHR-X0108-90

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–15

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–10 Placing a Label on the OCP Door
digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

NNnNN
SHR_X1128C_89

Place the Sx72 OCP label as shown in Figure C–10 and the magazine tape
subsystem label as shown in Figure C–11.

C.2.5 Powering Up the Sx300 Storage Array
Now that the Sx300 storage array has been converted to the dual-host
configuration and is labeled, you are ready to apply power.
CAUTION
Make sure that the ac power switch on each Sx72 storage enclosure
and magazine tape subsystem installed is in the off position.

C–16 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

Figure C–11 Placing a Label on the Magazine Tape Subsystem

O P ER ATO R C O N TR O L P AN EL

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

Power On

DSSI
NODE
ID LABEL

Write
Protected
Tape In Use
Use
Cleaning Tape
Magazine
Fault
Loader Fault

Eject

Load/Unload

Slot Select

0
Power On
Write
Protected

Write Protect
Load Fault

Tape In Use
Head Clean
Indicator
Drive Fault
Loader Fault

40% REDUCTION

SHR_X1025C_89

3. At the rear of the storage array, turn on each Sx72 storage enclosure
starting with position 1 and continuing in numerical order.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–17

C.2 Conversion Procedure

4. Press each drive dc power switch for each Sx72 storage enclosure. Start
with position 1 and continue in numerical order.
5. Observe the OCP indicators. See Figure C–12.
a. Check that the TERM PWR indicator (behind the door of the OCP) is
on for all positions installed.
b. Check that the SPLIT indicator (behind the door of the OCP) is off for
all positions.
c.

Make sure that all DSSI ID switches on all OCPs are set to left-rear
(ID = 1), left-front (ID = 2), right-front (ID = 3), and right-rear (ID =
4).

6. Press the Ready button on the OCP. See Figure C–12. The green Ready
indicator flickers, then lights steadily once the ISE is on-line.
Figure C–12 OCP Indicators and Controls

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128_89

C.2.6 Bringing a Dual-Host Conversion On-Line
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–IM)
for the section on configuring a dual-host configuration.
Note that you will be instructed to perform the following tasks:
•

Boot VAX/DS on the host systems.

•

Attach the KFMSA modules in each system.

C–18 Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration

C.2 Conversion Procedure

•

Select each KFMSA module in each system.

•

Run EVCXE or EVCXF.

•

Modify certain parameters in the disk ISEs.

•

Make sure that all modified parameters are recorded as permanent values.

•

Verify the communication path with all ISEs on the DSSI buses.

After all of the above have been accomplished successfully, return the systems
and the Sx300 storage array to normal operating mode.

C.2.7 Final Verification
Now that the Sx300 conversion, cabling and labeling, and the powering up
steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and verify
the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the host system.
Refer to the KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual (EK–KFMSA–
IM), Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual, and the Integrated Storage
Element User Guide for detailed information and how to proceed with verifying
the correct operation of each ISE that has been installed. In these manuals,
you will find the procedure for establishing the communications between the
ISEs, the adapter module, and the system. You will also find the step-by-step
procedures for reconfiguring the system with its newly installed DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.
Remember, each Sx72 enclosure can contain two or four disk ISEs. Each
magazine tape subsystem contains one tape ISE. A fully configured storage
array contains 24 disk ISEs and 2 tape ISEs.

Converting a Single-Host Configuration to a Dual-Host Configuration C–19

D
Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000
Systems
This appendix describes the steps to install the DECarray correctly and safely
with VAX 4000™ systems in two configurations:
•

Single-system installation (Section D.1) where one CK–SF200–LP cable kit
is required per DSSI bus.

•

DSSI VAXcluster™ installation (Section D.2) where two CK–SF200–LP
cable kits are required per DSSI bus.

Perform the steps in the appropriate section only after you have completed the
installation of the DECarray as described in previous chapters.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed.
Digital Multivendor Customer Services or trained installing personnel must
perform the step in the following WARNING:
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are in the storage array and in the components of
the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.
Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–1

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray
As many as four single-system configured VAX 4000 systems can connect with
a single DECarray.
The single DECarray requires connection to a DSSI adapter to support the
DSSI integrated storage elements (ISEs). The VAX 4000 Model 300 provides
two embedded DSSI adapters on the KA670 CPU module and also supports up
to two KFQSA DSSI adapters installed in the system Q-bus™ backplane. The
VAX 4000 Model 200 provides one embedded DSSI adapter on the KA660 CPU
module and also supports up to two KFQSA DSSI adapters installed in the
system Q-bus backplane.
In a single-system configuration, up to seven ISEs and one adapter can be
supported on a single DSSI bus. That DSSI bus can consist of one tape ISE
and up to, six disk ISEs or up to seven disk ISEs (where one disk ISE is in the
system enclosure). For further information on single-system configurations,
refer to the customer hardware information kit.
Briefly, a fully configured single-system system could contain one of the
following:
•

Two TF857 magazine tape ISEs. 8 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage
enclosures) and no ISEs internal to the system enclosure.

•

One TF857 magazine tape ISE. 20 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage
enclosures) and one ISEs internal to the system enclosure.

•

24 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage enclosures) and two ISEs internal to the
system enclosure.

Figure D–1 shows all the possible single-system DSSI buses.
Note
A single-system DSSI bus can only be connected from a VAX 4000
system to a single DECarray and then terminate in that array. No
additional expanders can be connected to that DSSI bus.

For a VAX 4000 Model 200, DSSI bus 0 connect to ports 1 on the DECarray.
The first KFQSA adapter connects to port 2 and the second KFQSA adapter
connects to port 3.

D–2 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–1 Possible Single-System DSSI Bus Configurations

Magazine

SF72

SF200 I/O

Tape

PORT

Subsystem

Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

PORT

Subsystem
T

108-inch

70-inch

42-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-3F

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SYS

SF200 I/O

42-inch

BC21Q-3F

Magazine
Tape

42-inch

SF200 I/O

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

DSSI TERMINATOR

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

12-31281-01

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SF200 I/O
PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

42-inch
D

BC21Q-3F

SplitBus

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SF200 I/O
PORT

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

DSSI TERMINATOR
12-31281-01

SHR-X0167A-90

For a VAX 4000 Model 300, DSSI bus 0 and 1 connect to ports 1 and 2 on the
DECarray. The first KFQSA adapter connects to port 3 and the second KFQSA
adapter connects to port 4.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–3

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

This section provides the procedures for installing the DECarray in a singlesystem configuration correctly and safely. Digital Multivendor Customer
Services or trained installing personnel must perform the procedures.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed.
The procedures provide the steps to:
•

Inspecting the array for proper configuration (Section D.1.1)

•

Cable the DECarray with an existing VAX 4000 system in the singlesystem configuration (Section D.1.2)

•

Verify the DECarray for correct operation (Section D.1.3)

D.1.1 Inspecting the Storage Array (Single-System)
This procedure describes the steps to inspect the DECarray for correct
configuration.
At the front of the DECarray:
a. The DSSI ID switches behind the door of the operator control panel (OCP)
of every SF7x enclosure installed are set according to Table D–1 and
Figure D–2.
b. The Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) switch (right-most switch of
each switch pack) should be in the down or enabled position at all times
unless you are instructed to change it to the up or disabled position.
Table D–1 SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View)
Positions 1, 2, 4, and 71

MSCP

Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

0
0
0
0

Positions 3 and 81

MSCP

Switch
Settings
001
010
011
100
Switch
Settings

Corresponding
DSSI ID Number
1
2
3
4
Corresponding
DSSI ID Number

1 The switch settings for OCPs in these positions are 0 = down and 1 = up.

(continued on next page)

D–4 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Table D–1 (Cont.) SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View)
Positions 3 and 81

MSCP

Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

0
0
0
0

Switch
Settings

Corresponding
DSSI ID Number
5
6
6
5

101
110
110
101

1 The switch settings for OCPs in these positions are 0 = down and 1 = up.

Figure D–2 Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128B_89

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–5

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Make sure that the DSSI ID numbers of each TF857 magazine tape ISE
installed in the array are set to 0 and that the Tape Mass Storage Control
Protocol (TMSCP) switch is enabled (down). Refer to the TF857 magazine tape
ISE documentation for the procedure to access the DSSI adapter module.

D.1.2 Cabling the Storage Array (Single-System)
Start at the rear of the DECarray cabinet.
1. Plug the main power cable of the storage array into its power receptacle.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are in the storage array and in the components of
the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.
Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

2. Connect the 108–inch DSSI cable or cables (part number BC22Q–09) from
the array DSSI I/O panel to the appropriate system DSSI connector.
a. At the system DSSI connector, remove the terminator or terminators
(part number 12–29258–01). See Figure D–3. Store these terminators
in the ESD pouch on the rear door of the storage array cabinet.
b. The system DSSI connectors are (see Figure D–3):
•

DSSI Bus 0 (embedded adapter, also connects to internal TF and
RF ISEs)

•

DSSI Bus 1, Model 300 only (embedded adapter, TF and RF ISEs)

•

KFQSA 1 (first installed adapter in the Q-bus backplane, RF ISEs
only)

•

KFQSA 2 (second installed adapter in the Q-bus backplane, RF
ISEs only)
Note

Only ports 1 through 4 are used on the DECarray in a single-system
configuration.

D–6 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–3 VAX 4000 DSSI Connectors

FRONT VIEW
Model 200/300
BA4xx

Model 200
BA2xx
slot #2

slot #1

slot #0

slot #3

Mass Storage Area

slot #2

slot #1

slot #0

Mass Storage Area

Operator/
Control Panel

Q−Bus

AC
on/off

H3604
KFQSA

KFQSA
J1

Description

J1
KFQSA − J1

DSSI Bus 0 port (internal/external ISEs)
DSSI IN/OUT port (external RF disk ISEs)

AC Input

Fan Tray

Connector

Ground
Stud

Connector
J1, J2
J3
KFQSA − J1

Description
DSSI Bus 1 ports (external ISEs only)
DSSI Bus 0 port (internal/external ISEs)
DSSI IN/OUT port (external RF disk ISEs)
VAX4000_family.rags

Install the terminator or terminators (part number 12–31281–01) to
their correct position on the SF7x enclosures, TF857 magazine tape
ISEs, and system I/O panel.
Note that the positions are numbered on the cabinet frame side rails
on the front and the rear of the cabinet.
•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1 ONLY then
install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the left DSSI connector of the
enclosure.

•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1 and a
TF857 magazine tape ISE in positions 5 and 6, then install a
terminator (12–31281–01) in the bottom DSSI connector of the
TF857 magazine tape ISE in position 6.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–7

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

•

If the array has two TF857 magazine tape ISEs in positions 5 and
6, then install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the bottom DSSI
connector of both TF857 magazine tape ISEs.

•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1 only, then
install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the leftmost DSSI connector
of position 1.

•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1 and 2, then
install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the leftmost DSSI connectors
of position 1 and 2.

•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1, 2, 3, 4, and
7, then install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the leftmost DSSI
connectors of positions 4 and 7.

•

If the array has an SF7x storage enclosure in position 1, 2, 3, 4,
7, and 8, then install a terminator (12–31281–01) in the leftmost
DSSI connectors of position 4 and 7.

3. Connect the ground strap (provided with the cable kit). Attach one end
of the strap according to the instructions found in the System Expansion
Installation Supplement (part number EK-431AB-IN). Connect the other
end to one of the screws securing the power controller to the storage array.
4. All other configurations, with or without TF857 magazine tape ISEs, do not
need terminators.
D.1.2.1 Example of a Fully Configured Single-System System
The following section shows a fully configured single-system consisting of a
DECarray with 18 disk ISEs and two TF857 magazine tape ISEs connected to
a VAX 4000 systems.
REMEMBER that DSSI Bus 0 from the VAX 4000 Model 300 can have tape
and disk ISEs on it that are internally mounted in the system enclosure. Also
DSSI Bus 0 and 1 (the embedded DSSI buses) are the ONLY two DSSI buses
from the system that can support the DSSI tape ISEs (TF857).
Use Table D–2 for configuring DSSI bus 0.

D–8 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Table D–2 DSSI Bus 0 Configurations
System Internal ISEs

DECarray

Tape ISE

Disk ISE

Tape ISE

Disk ISE

0 or 1

up to 6

0 or 1

up to 6

0 or 1

up to 4

0 or 1

up to 4

0 or 1

up to 2

up to 6

up to 4

up to 2

D.1.2.2 Completing the System Configuration Sheet (Single-System)
At this time, you should be ready to fill out the system configuration sheet
(Figure D–5). The information from the system configuration sheet is used to
fill out the labels correctly for all DSSI cables, enclosure OCPs, and ISEs.

Note
Do not attempt to fill out and place the labels until you have completed
the system configuration sheet.

You can also refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part
number 36–32882–01) for instructions on how to fill out the labels.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–9

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–4 Single-System Bus Configurations
SF300 I/O
PORT 1
SYS

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Magazine Tape
Subsystem
T

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

108− inch

70−inch

42−inch

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

BC21Q−3F

BC21Q−3F
D

Split−Bus

DSSI BUS 0

SF300 I/O
PORT 2
SYS

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Magazine Tape
Subsystem
T

108− inch

70−inch

42−inch

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

BC21Q−3F

D
BC21Q−3F
D

DSSI BUS 1

SYS 108− inch

70−inch

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

42−inch
BC21Q−3F
D

Split−Bus

KFQSA 1

SF300 I/O
PORT 4

SF72
Storage
Enclosure
D

SYS 108− inch

70−inch

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

SF72
Storage
Enclosure
D

42−inch
BC21Q−3F
D

KFQSA 2
new_single.rags

D–10 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D
42−inch

SF300 I/O
PORT 3

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Split−Bus

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–5 Single-System Configuration Sheet

DSSI Single−System Configuration Sheet
[for MicroVAX II, MicroVAX/VAXserver 3xxx (Q−bus), and VAX 4000 systems]
DSSI ADAPTER
Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID
Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS

Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

ALLO_CLASS
SF200 Box #
UNITNUM

Color Code
config_single.rags

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–11

D.1 Single-System Installation of an DECarray

D.1.3 Single-System Final Verification
Now that all the hardware installation, cabling and labeling, and the powering
up steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and
verify the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the system.
Refer to the system installation manuals and TF857 Magazine Tape ISE
Service Manual (EK–TF857–SM) for detailed information and how to proceed
with verifying the correct operation of each ISE that has been installed. In
these manuals, you will find the procedure for establishing the communications
between the ISEs, the adapter module, and the system. You will also find the
step-by-step procedures for reconfiguring the system with its newly installed
DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.
Remember, each SF7x storage enclosure can contain two or four disk ISEs.
Each TF857 magazine tape ISE contains one tape ISE. A fully configured
DECarray contains up to 24 disk ISEs and/or up to 4 tape ISEs.
If at any time you detect a failure, refer to Chapter 8.
Once the verification is complete, mount the front bezel and close the rear
door; turn the hex-Allen fasteners clockwise to lock. The system is ready to be
turned over to the system manager.

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray
As many as two pairs of DSSI VAXcluster configured VAX 4000 systems can be
used with a single DECarray.
A single DECarray requires connection to two DSSI adapters to support each
DSSI bus. The VAX 4000 Model 300 provides two embedded DSSI adapters on
the KA670 CPU module and also supports up to two KFQSA DSSI adapters
installed in the system Q-bus backplane. The VAX 4000 Model 200 provides
one embedded DSSI adapter on the KA660 CPU module and also supports up
to two KFQSA DSSI adapters installed in the system Q-bus backplane.
In a DSSI VAXcluster configuration, up to six ISEs and two adapters can be
supported on a single DSSI bus. That configuration can consist of one tape ISE
and up to five disk ISEs or six disk ISEs (where one disk ISE is in the system
enclosure). For further information on DSSI VAXcluster configurations, refer
to the customer hardware information kit.

D–12 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Briefly, a fully configured DSSI VAXcluster system could contain one of the
following:
•

Two TF857 magazine tape ISEs. 16 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage
enclosures) and and two ISEs internal to the systems enclosure.

•

One TF857 magazine tape ISE. 16 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage
enclosures) and three ISEs internal to the systems enclosure.

•

16 RF disk ISEs (in SF7x storage enclosures) and four ISEs internal to the
systems enclosure.

Figure D–6 shows the possible DSSI VAXcluster buses.
Figure D–6 Possible DSSI VAXcluster DSSI Bus Configurations

SF200 I/O

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

SF72

BC21Q-3F

Magazine
Tape

PORT

Subsystem

PORT

42-inch

SF200 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SF200 I/O
PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SF72
SF200 I/O

SF200 I/O

Storage
Enclosure

PORT

SYS

108-inch

70-inch

108-inch

SYS

BC21Q-09

BC21R-5L

BC21Q-09

SHR-X0168A-90

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–13

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Note
A DSSI VAXcluster bus can only be connected from a VAX 4000 to a
single DECarray and then to another VAX 4000.

For a VAX 4000 Model 200, DSSI bus 0 connect to ports 1 and 9 on the
DECarray. The first KFQSA adapter connects to port 2 and 10. The second
KFQSA adapter connects to port 3 and 11.
For a VAX 4000 Model 300, DSSI bus 0 and 1 connect to ports 1, 2 and 9, 10 on
the DECarray. The first KFQSA adapter connects to port 3 and 11. The second
KFQSA adapter connects to port 4 and 12.
This section provides the procedures for installing the DECarray in a DSSI
VAXcluster configuration correctly and safely. Digital Multivendor Customer
Services or trained installing personnel must perform the procedures.
Make sure that all precautions for site preparation have been completed. Refer
to DECarray installation guide.
The following procedures provide the steps to:
•

Inspecting the array for proper configuration (Section D.2.1)

•

Cable the DECarray with an existing VAX 4000 Model 300 system in the
DSSI VAXcluster configuration (Section D.2.2)

•

Verify the DECarray for correct operation (Section D.2.3)

D.2.1 Inspecting the Storage Array (DSSI VAXcluster)
This procedure describes the steps to inspect the DECarray for correct
configuration.
Inspection the DECarray from the front, then from the rear.
At the front of the DECarray:
a. The DSSI ID switches behind the door of the OCP of every SF7x enclosure
installed are set according to Table D–3 and Figure D–7.
b. The MSCP switch (right-most switch of each switch pack) should be in the
down or enabled position at all times unless you are instructed to change it
to the up or disabled position.

D–14 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Table D–3 SF7x DSSI ID Verification (Front View)
ALL Positions1

MSCP

Left Rear (LR)
Left Front (LF)
Right Front (RF)
Right Rear (RR)

0
0
0
0

Switch
Settings
001
010
011
100

Corresponding
DSSI ID Number
1
2
3
4

1 The switch settings for OCPs in these positions are 0 = down and 1 = up.

Make sure that the DSSI ID numbers of each TF857 magazine tape ISE
installed in the array are set to 0 and that the TMSCP switch is enabled
(down). Refer to the TF857 magazine tape ISE documentation for the
procedure to access the DSSI adapter module.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–15

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–7 Verifying the SF7x DSSI ID Switch Settings

digi tal

Write
Ready Protect Fault

DSSI
ID

Write
Ready Protect Fault

SHR_X1128B_89

D.2.2 Cabling the Storage Array (DSSI VAXcluster)
Start at the rear of the DECarray cabinet.
1. Plug the main power cable of the storage array into its power receptacle.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are in the storage array and in the components of
the storage array.
When performing any operation involving the power source, turn off
the power controls of all components and on the power controller.
Disconnect the power cable from the source outlet. Perform the
operation, then reconnect the power cable to the source.

D–16 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

2. Connect the 108–inch DSSI cable or cables (part number BC22Q–09) from
the array DSSI I/O panel to the appropriate system DSSI connector.
a. At the system DSSI connector, remove the terminator or terminators
(part number 12–29258–01). See Figure D–8. Store these terminators
in the ESD pouch on the rear door of the storage array cabinet.
b. The system DSSI connectors are (see Figure D–8):
•

DSSI Bus 0 (embedded adapter, also connects to internal TF and
RF ISEs)

•

DSSI Bus 1, Model 300 only (embedded adapter, TF and RF ISEs)

•

KFQSA 1 (first installed adapter in the Q-bus backplane, RF ISEs
only)

•

KFQSA 2 (second installed adapter in the Q-bus backplane, RF
ISEs only)

Connect DSSI bus 0 of either DSSI VAXcluster system through the
DECarray and then to DSSI bus 1 on the other DSSI VAXcluster system.
This allows for the maximum number of embedded ISEs in a DSSI
VAXcluster configuration.
3. Connect the ground strap (provided with the cable kit). Attach one end
of the strap according to the instructions found in the System Expansion
Installation Supplement (part number EK-431AB-IN). Connect the other
end to one of the screws securing the power controller to the storage array.

D.2.2.1 Example of a Fully Configured DSSI VAXcluster System
The following section shows a fully configured DSSI VAXcluster system
consisting of a DECarray with 16 disk ISEs and two TF857 magazine tape
ISEs connected to two VAX 4000 (each with one RF disk ISE).
DSSI Bus 0 from the VAX 4000 Model 300 can have tape and disk ISEs on it
that are internally mounted in the system enclosure. Also DSSI Bus 0 and 1
(the embedded DSSI buses) are the ONLY two DSSI buses from the system
that can support the DSSI tape ISEs.
Use Table D–4 for configuring DSSI bus 0 on either system to DSSI bus 1 of
the other DSSI VAXcluster system.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–17

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–8 VAX 4000 DSSI Connectors

FRONT VIEW
Model 200/300
BA4xx

Model 200
BA2xx
slot #2

slot #1

slot #0

slot #3

Mass Storage Area

slot #2

slot #1

slot #0

Mass Storage Area

Operator/
Control Panel

Q−Bus

AC
on/off

H3604
KFQSA

KFQSA
J1

J1
KFQSA − J1

Description
DSSI Bus 0 port (internal/external ISEs)
DSSI IN/OUT port (external RF disk ISEs)

AC Input

Fan Tray

Connector

Ground
Stud

Connector
J1, J2
J3
KFQSA − J1

Description
DSSI Bus 1 ports (external ISEs only)
DSSI Bus 0 port (internal/external ISEs)
DSSI IN/OUT port (external RF disk ISEs)
VAX4000_family.rags

D–18 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Table D–4 DSSI Bus 0 to DSSI Bus 1 Configurations
System Internal ISEs
DSSI Bus 0

DECarray

Tape ISE

Disk ISE

Tape ISE

Disk ISE

0 or 1

up to 4

0 or 1

up to 4

0 or 1

up to 2

0 or 1

none

up to 4

up to 2

D.2.2.2 Completing the System Configuration Sheet (DSSI VAXcluster)
At this time, you should be ready to fill out the system configuration sheet
(Figure D–10). The information from the system configuration sheet is used to
fill out the labels correctly for all DSSI cables, enclosure OCPs, and ISEs.
Note
Do not attempt to fill out and place the labels until you have completed
the system configuration sheet.

You can also refer to the inside cover of the SF Family Label Booklet (part
number 36–32882–01) for instructions on how to fill out these labels.

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–19

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–9 DSSI VAXcluster Bus Configurations
SF300 I/O
PORT 1

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Magazine Tape
Subsystem
T

SF300 I/O
PORT 9

SYS

108− inch

70−inch

42−inch

70−inch

108− inch

SYS

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

BC21Q−3F

BC21R−5L

BC22Q−09

DSSI BUS 0
Plus 1 RF ISE

DSSI BUS 1

SF300 I/O
PORT 2
SYS
A

SF72
Storage
Enclosure

Magazine Tape
Subsystem
T

SF300 I/O
PORT 10

108− inch

70−inch

42−inch

70−inch

108− inch

SYS

BC22Q−09

BC21R−5L

BC21Q−3F

BC21R−5L

BC22Q−09

DSSI BUS 1

DSSI BUS 0
Plus 1 RF ISE

SF300 I/O
PORT 3

SF72
Storage
Enclosure
D

SF300 I/O
PORT 11

SYS 108− inch

70−inch

108− inch

SYS

BC21R−5L

BC22Q−09

KFQSA 1

SF300 I/O
PORT 4

SF72
Storage
Enclosure
D

SF300 I/O
PORT 12

SYS 108− inch

70−inch

108− inch

SYS

BC21R−5L

BC22Q−09

KFQSA 2

KFQSA 2
new_dual.rags

D–20 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

Figure D–10 DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet

DSSI VAXcluster Configuration Sheet
[for MicroVAX II, MicroVAX/VAXserver 3xxx (Q−bus), and VAX 4000 systems]
DSSI ADAPTER
Bus
DSSI ID #

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

Device Type
DSSI ID #
Node Name
System ID

ALLO_CLASS
Array Pos. #
UNITNUM

DSSI ADAPTER
Bus
DSSI ID #
Color Code
config_double,rags

Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems D–21

D.2 DSSI VAXcluster Installation of an DECarray

D.2.3 DSSI VAXcluster Final Verification
Now that all the hardware installation, cabling and labeling, and the powering
up steps are complete, you are ready to configure the DSSI subsystem and
verify the correct operation of each ISE in the array with the system.
Refer to the system installation manuals and TF857 Magazine Tape ISE
Service Manual (EK–TF857–SM) for detailed information and how to proceed
with verifying the correct operation of each ISE that has been installed. In
these manuals, you will find the procedure for establishing the communications
between the ISEs, the adapter module, and the system. You will also find the
step-by-step procedures for reconfiguring the system with its newly installed
DSSI devices.
Refer to the manuals for the disk ISE and tape ISE for detailed information on
the local programs in the ISEs.
Once the verification is complete, close the cabinet doors; turn the hex-Allen
fasteners one quarter turn clockwise to lock. The system is ready to be turned
over to the system manager.

D–22 Installing a DECarray with VAX 4000 Systems

Index
A
Acoustic, 1–10
Add-on order sequence, 3–1
Adjustable retainer brackets, 3–29
Assembly of universal chassis rail, 3–21

B
Bezel, front
removal and replacement, 3–7
Bezel connector cap, removal, 3–10
Bringing on-line
disk ISE, 8–9, B–8
dual-host conversion, C–18

C
Cabinet installation, 7–2
Cabling diagrams, SF300 (DSSI) storage
array, A–1
Cabling diagrams, Sx300 storage array
dual-host configurations, A–31
single-host configurations, A–6
Chassis rails, RETMA
installing RETMA enclosure chassis rails,
3–15
Chassis rails, universal
installing universal enclosure chassis
rails, 3–20
Chassis retainer brackets, 3–14
Chassis stabilizer brackets, 3–14

Chassis stabilizer brackets for RA9x, 3–6
Circuit breaker
887–C power controller, 3–40
storage element, 7–12
Common failure influences, 8–14
Common failure modes/symptoms, 8–15
Connecting to VAX 4000, 1–4
Connections, 3–37
Connectors, 3–40
Controls and indicators, 3–37
Converting to dual-host configuration, C–1
bringing dual-host conversion on-line,
C–18
final verification, C–19
labeling cables, C–11
labels, filling out, C–13
labels, placement of, C–15
powering up, C–16
securing array for, C–2
system configuration sheet, C–12
through-bus mode conversion, C–6
Converting to split-bus mode, C–4
Converting to through-bus mode, C–6
887–C power controller cable (cordage),
3–40

D
DECarray
cabling
DSSI VAXcluster configuration, D–16
single-system configuration, D–6
DSSI VAXcluster configuration, D–12
final verification

Index–1

DECarray
final verification (cont’d)
of DSSI VAXcluster configuration,
D–22
of single-system configuration, D–12
inspection
DSSI VAXcluster configuration, D–14
single-system configuration, D–4
installation of, D–1
DSSI VAXcluster configuration, D–12
single-system configuration, D–2
installation of, with VAX 4000, D–1
single-system configuration, D–2
DECArray300 cabinet system, description,
1–1
DECArray300 shipping container contents,
2–1
DECArray300 storage array
doors, how to open, 2–5
inspection, 2–5
leveling, 2–3, 2–4
placement of, 2–4
unloading procedures, 2–2
Door on DECArray300, removal of
rear, 2–5
DSSI bus meter, 8–4
DSSI ID
switch settings
SF7x, 5–12
verification of
for DSSI VAXcluster configuration,
D–14
for single-host configuration, 4–3
for single-system configuration, D–4
DSSI signal integrity, 1–11
DSSI terminators
illustration of
for DSSI VAXcluster configuration,
D–17
for dual-host configuration, 4–18
for single-host configuration, 4–8
for single-system configuration, D–7
installation of
for single-host configuration, 4–9
for single-system configuration, D–7

Index–2

DSSI terminators (cont’d)
placement of
for single-system configuration, D–7
DSSI VAXcluster configuration
description of, D–12
Dual Host Cabling rules, A–2
Dual-host configuration
See also Converting to dual-host
configuration
cabling a magazine tape subsystem for,
6–20
cabling an SF7x for, 5–29
converting to, C–1
description of, 4–2

E
Electrical specifications (120/240 Vac),
DECArray300, 1–7
Electrostatic discharge, 3–7, 7–8
EMC finger strips on SA7x, 3–6
EMI/EMC, 1–11
Environmental operating range, 1–8
ESD, electrostatic discharge, 2–2

F
FCC approval, 1–11
Front panel J10, J11, 3–39

G
Grille (bezel) mounting brackets, 3–14

H
Half bezel mounting, 3–10
Hardware installation procedures
magazine tape subsystem, 6–9
SF7x storage enclosure, 5–11

Indicators, 3–37
Inspection
of DECArray300 storage array, 2–5
of ramps, 2–3
of shipped equipment, 2–1, 5–4, 6–3
Installation
disk drive, center level, 7–7
disk drive, lower level, 3–6, 7–8
disk drive, upper level, 7–7
disk or tape drive, center level, 3–6
disk or tape drive, upper level, 3–5
of DECarray, D–1
of disk ISE into Sx72–HK storage
enclosure, B–2
of magazine tape subsystem, 6–1
of SF3xx storage array, 4–1
of SF7x storage enclosure, 5–1
of Sx72–UK upgrade kit, B–1
SA300/H9643 cabinet system, 7–2
troubleshooting, 8–1
Installation with a VAX 4000
of DECarray, D–1
Installing left position RETMA chassis rail
assembly, 3–15
Installing left position universal chassis rail
assembly, 3–26
Installing right position RETMA chassis rail
assembly, 3–19
Installing right position universal chassis
rail assembly, 3–23
ISE errors, 8–14

Labeling cables
dual-host conversion, C–11
magazine tape subsystem installation,
6–24
SF7x installation, 5–43
Labeling the magazine tape subsystem,
6–24, 6–25
Labeling the operator control panel, 5–44
SF7x installation, 5–43
Labels, filling out
dual-host configuration, 4–20
dual-host conversion, C–13
magazine tape subsystem installation,
6–24
SF7x installation, 5–44
single-host configuration, 4–10
Labels, placement of
dual-host configuration, 4–20
dual-host conversion, C–15
on DSSI cables, 5–44, 6–25
on magazine tape subsystem, 6–25
on SF7x operator control panel, 5–44
single-host configuration, 4–11
LEDs
all blinking, 8–15
green blinking, 8–15
yellow on, 8–15
Lifting device
procedure for using, 3–29

K
KFMSA bulkhead connector
for dual-host configuration, 4–18
for single-host configuration, 4–8
Kick plate, cabinet, 3–5, 3–6, 7–8
removal and replacement, 3–13

M
Magazine tape subsystem
cabling
for dual-host configuration, 6–20
for single-host configuration, 6–14
in Sx300 storage array, 6–13
final verification, 6–27
installation
in Sx300 storage array, 6–2
installation procedure, 6–8
kit contents, 6–3

Index–3

Magazine tape subsystem (cont’d)
labeling cables, 6–24
labels, filling out, 6–24
powering up, 6–23
troubleshooting, 8–11
unpacking, 6–3
where to install, 6–4
Magazine tape subsystem fault matrix, 8–13
MSCP switch, 4–3, D–4, D–14

Repacking
DECArray300 cabinet system, 2–8
RF72 disk ISE
bringing on-line, B–8
installation into Sx72–HK storage
enclosure, B–2
Rx7x disk ISE
bringing on-line, 8–9
removal from SF7x storage enclosure,
8–4

O
OCP, removal and replacement, 3–10

P
Part number
DECArray300 variations, 1–1
Sx300 storage element, 2–9
Physical specifications, DECArray300, 1–6
Power connectors, 3–34
Power controller, 3–33, 7–2
Power cords, 3–33, 7–8
Power-up
disk ISEs
after Sx72–UK upgrade, B–5
magazine tape subsystem, 6–23
SF3xx storage array
single-host configuration, 4–12
SF7x storage enclosure, 5–43
Sx300 storage array
after dual-host conversion, C–16
Prefilter, 3–9

R
Ramp inspection, 2–3
Rear access panel
replacement, 3–11
Rear access panel, cabinet
removal and replacement, 3–11
Related documents, xvi
Repackaging
materials, 2–9

Index–4

S
S1 switches, 3–38
Safety precautions
disconnecting power source, 4–1, D–1
unloading storage array, 2–2
using ESD straps, 2–2
SDI/DSSI cables, internal, 3–33
SDI cables, internal, 7–8
SF1 first storage element to install, 3–4
SF300 storage array
DSSI cabling diagrams, A–1
SF3xx storage array
cabling
dual-host configuration, 4–17
single-host configuration, 4–7
dual-host configurations, 4–2
final verification
of single-host configuration, 4–15
inspection
dual-host configuration, 4–16
single-host configuration, 4–3
installation of, 4–1
dual-host configuration, 4–16
single-host configuration, 4–2
labeling
dual-host configuration, 4–18
single-host configuration, 4–9
powering up
single-host configuration, 4–12
single-host configurations, 4–2
SF7x storage enclosure
cabling
for dual-host configuration, 5–29

SF7x storage enclosure
cabling (cont’d)
for single-host configuration, 5–16
in Sx300 storage array, 5–14
final verification, 5–46
installation
in Sx300 storage array, 5–2
installation procedure, 5–10
kit contents, 5–4
labeling cables, 5–43
labels, filling out, 5–44
powering up, 5–43
removing the Rx7x disk ISE, 8–4
unpacking, 5–3
where to install, 5–5
single host cabling rules, A–1
Single-host configuration
cabling a magazine tape subsystem for,
6–14
cabling an SF7x for, 5–16
converting to dual-host configuration,
C–1
description of, 4–2
Single-System configuration
description of, D–2
Site preparation, 7–1
Slide mount, 6–9
Soft error rates, 8–16
Split-bus mode, 5–3, 5–5
converting to, C–4
Split bus mode. How to change SF7x to Split
Bus mode, C–4
SPLIT indicator
See also Split-bus mode; Through-bus
mode
single-host configuration, 4–15
Stabilizer plate (weight), 3–13, 7–7
Storage elements position, 3–4
stripeset cabling rules, A–3
Stripeset configurations, 5–5
SU storage array
doors, 2–8
Switches
circuit breaker, 887–C, 3–40
circuit breaker, storage element, 7–12

Sx300 average product noise emission data,
1–10
Sx300 storage array
installation of
magazine tape subsystem in, 6–1
SF7x storage enclosure in, 5–1
preparing for magazine tape subsystem
installation, 6–8
preparing for SF7x installation, 5–11
unpacking, 2–1
Sx300 storage array site preparation, 1–12
Sx300 weight, 3–30
Sx72–HK storage enclosure
installing disk ISE in, B–2
Sx72–UK upgrade
installation of, B–1
installing disk ISE, B–2
powering up, B–5
securing array for, B–2
System configuration sheet
blank sheet for single-host system, 1–13
blank sheet for three-host system, 1–15
checking for magazine tape subsystem
installation, 6–4
checking for SF7x installation, 5–5
completing for DSSI VAXcluster
configuration, D–19
completing for dual-host configuration,
4–19
completing for dual-host conversion,
C–12
completing for single-host configuration,
4–10
completing for single-system configuration,
D–9
updating for magazine tape subsystem
installation, 6–24
updating for SF7x installation, 5–43

T
TERM PWR indicator, 4–14

Index–5

TF1 first tape loader storage element to
install, 3–5
Thermal stabilization, 1–16
Through-bus mode, 5–3
converting to, C–6
Tools, required
for dual-host conversion, C–1
for magazine tape subsystem installation,
6–1
for SF7x installation, 5–1
for troubleshooting
DSSI bus meter, 8–3, 8–4
Top cover
removal and replacement, 3–11
Top cover, cabinet
removal and replacement, 7–7
Troubleshooting
basic steps, 8–1
installation, 8–1
magazine tape subsystem, 8–11
SF7x storage enclosure, 8–1
Troubleshooting chart, 8–2

Index–6

U
Unloading procedures, DECArray300 storage
array, 2–2
Unpacking
magazine tape subsystem, 6–3
SF7x storage enclosure, 5–3
Sx300 storage array, 2–1
Unpacking/Repacking
of storage elements, 2–8
Upgrade
See Sx72–UK upgrade

V
Verification, final
of DSSI VAXcluster configuration, D–22
of dual-host conversion, C–19
of magazine tape subsystem, 6–27
of SF7x storage enclosure, 5–46
of single-host configuration, 4–15
of single-system configuration, D–12